DK201670738A1

DK201670738A1 - Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Feedback During Interaction with an Intensity-Sensitive Button

Info

Publication number: DK201670738A1
Application number: DKPA201670738A
Authority: DK
Inventors: Imran A Chaudhri
Original assignee: Apple Inc
Priority date: 2016-09-06
Filing date: 2016-09-20
Publication date: 2018-02-12
Also published as: DK201670740A1; DK179223B1; DK179223B9; DK180150B1; DK201670739A1; DK179630B1

Abstract

An electronic device: displays a home button configuration user interface with a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button. While displaying the home button configuration user interface, the device detects selection of a respective tactile output setting. In response to detecting a first input of a first type on the home button (while the respective tactile output setting is selected), the device determines whether the respective tactile output setting is a first or a second tactile output setting for the home button. If the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting, the device provides a first tactile output without dismissing the home button configuration user interface. If the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting, the device provides a second tactile output without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

Description

<¹θ> DANMARK

0°) DK 2016 70738 A1

PATENTANSØGNING

(12)

Patent- og

Varemærkestyrelsen (51) Int.CI.: G06F 3/01(2006.01) (21) Ansøgningsnummer: PA 2016 70738 (22) Indleveringsdato: 2016-09-20 (24) Løbedag: 2016-09-19 (41) Aim. tilgængelig: 2018-02-12 (62) Stamansøgning nr: PA2016 70728 (30) Prioritet: 2016-09-06 US 62/384,180 (71) Ansøger: Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA (72) Opfinder: Imran A. Chaudhri, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino , 95014 CA California, USA (74) Fuldmægtig: Zacco Denmark A/S, Arne Jacobsens Allé 15, 2300 København S, Danmark (54) Benævnelse: Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Feedback During Interaction with an Intensity-Sensitive Button (56) Fremdragne publikationer:

US 8692736 B1 EP 2134069 A1 US 2015/0192997 A1 US 2014/0089791 A1 US 2010/0231367 A1 US 2009/0319893 A1 (57) Sammendrag:

Fortsættes ...

DK 2016 70738 A1

I/O Subsystem

Display Controller 158		Optical		Intensity	Haptic		Other Input
	sensor(s)		sensor(s)	Feedback		Controller(s)
	Controller 158		Controller 159	Controller 161		160

M	Π	n	H
1^103	1^103	1^103	1^103
Optical	Contact	Tactile Output	Other Input or
Sensor(s)	ii tTOi iöity	Generator(s)	Control
164	C?xSi Y'**’ / 185	167	Devices 116

Figure 1A p103

TouchSensitive

Display

System 112

DK 2016 70738 A1

Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Feedback During Interaction with an Intensitv-Sensitive Button

RELATED APPL ί CATION iooosj This application claims priority to U. S. Provisional Application Ser. No.

62/384,180, filed. September 6, 2016, entitled “Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Feedback During Interaction with an Intensity-Sensitive Button,” which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

TECHNICAL FIELD |0OO2] This relates generally to electronic devices with displays and intensitysensitive buttons, including but not limited to electronic devices with displays and an intensity-sensitive home button.

BACKGROUND [0003] Many electronic devices with displays include mechanical buttons, such as mechanical home buttons, to navigate between different user interfaces displayed on the electronic devices. But mechanical buttons provide little, if any, feedback to a user beyond a fixed down click and a fixed up click.

SUMMARY [00β4[ Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for providing visual· hapiic, and/or audio feedback during interaction with a button, which make manipulation of user interfaces more efficient and intuitive for a user. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for providing feedback dining interaction with a button. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user by helping the user to understand the connection between provided inputs and device responses to the inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [0(HI5| The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with buttons are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices, which include one or more intensity-sensitive buttons. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch), in some embodiments, the device has a touchpad, in some embodiments, the device has a touchsensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions, in some embodiments, the user Interacts with the GUI primarily through sty lus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e~ mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

{0ΘΟ6| In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device. The method includes; displaying, on the display, a first, user interlace and, while displaying the first user interface, detecting an input directed to the first user interface. In response ίο detecting the input directed to the first user interface, the method includes; ceasing to displaying the first user interface, and displaying a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface. While displaying the intensity threshold, displaying a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the firsi user imer face: and (id) while displaying the beginning of the transition from second user interface, the method includes· detecting a contact on the home button. While continuously detecting the contact on the home button, the method includes: (i) detecting au increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold; (it) iti response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first

DK 2016 70738 A1 the second user interface back to the fust user interface, detecting an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the input sequence, the method includes: (i) in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria fe g.. the first criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a. second intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected): (A s ceasing to display the second user interface, and (B) redisplaying the first user interface on the display; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, (e.g,, the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before, the end of the press input is detected): (A) reversing the beginning of the transition trom the second user interface back to the first user interface, and (B) redisplaying the second user interface on the display.

100071 in accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surfece unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensities of contacts wi th a home button of the device, and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: display, on the display, a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, detect an input directed to the first user interlace; in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface: (i) cease to display the first user interface, and (ii) display a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface; while displaying the second user interface, detect a contact on the home button; while continuously detecting the contact on the home button:

(i) detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold; (ii) in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensi ty threshold, di splay a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user in terface; (iii) while displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, detect, an input sequence that, includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the input sequence; (i.) in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected: (A) cease to

DK 2016 70738 A1 display the second user interface., and (Bl redisplay the fust user interface on the display; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria., wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before the end. of the press input is detected: (A) reverse the beginning of the transition from the second user interlace hack to the first user interface, and iß) redisplay the second user interface on the display.

(0008] In accordance with some embodiments, a method, is performed at an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface and, while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input (e.g . the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface), hi response to detecting the first input, the method includes' starting to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface. While the first animated transition is being displayed, the method includes: detecting a second input. In response to detecting the second input, the method includes: (i) in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time: (Al interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interlace to the second user interfece at a first point hi the first animated transition, and (B) displaying a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time: (A) interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interlace to the second user interlace at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and (B) displaying a third animated transition from the second point in die first animated transition to die third user interface, and the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

[0009] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface and a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: display a first user interface; while displaying the first user Interface, detect a first input, wherein the first Input is consistent

DK 2016 70738 A1 with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interlace; in response to detecting the first input, start to display a first, animated transition from the first user interface to a second user interface; while the first animated transition is being displayed, detect a second input; and in response to detecting the second input: (i) in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time: (A) interrupt the first animated transition foot» the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and (B) display a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface', and (is) in accordance wife a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that, the second input is received at. a second time that is after the first time; (A) interrupt the first animated transition frotn the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and (B) display a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to fhe third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition, (001.0] in accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes display ing a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, and the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button. While displaying the home button configuration user interface, the method includes: detecting selection of a respecti ve tac tile output setting of tire home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings. While the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, the method includes: detecting a first input of the first type on the home button. In response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, the method includes: (i) in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via fhe one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output, setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and,{ ii) in accordance with a determination that

DK 2016 70738 A1 the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting. different front the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface, [0011] In -accordance with some embodiments, an eiectronic device includes a dispiay unit configured to dispiay a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more tactile output, generating units to generate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generating units. The processing unit is configured to: display, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface, in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button; while displaying the home button configuration user interface, detect selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings; while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input ofthe first type on the home button, and,, tn response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button: (i) in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tacti le output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, (ii) in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for th home button configuration user interlace.

ί button without dismissing [0012] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a first user interface, and a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button. While displaying the first user interface, the method includes:

DK 2016 70738 A1 detecting a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface. In response to detecting die first input of'the first type directed to the first user interface, the method includes: (i) in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, perforating a first operation and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation, and (ii) in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, performing the first operation, and forgoing providing at least a portion of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation. After performing the first operation, the method includes; detecting a second input of the first type on the home button. In response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button: (i) performing a second operation that is associated with the home button; and (ii) providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

[0013] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more tactile output generating units to generate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generating units. The processing unit is configured to: display, on the display , a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button; while displaying the first, user interface, detect a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface; in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type directed to the first user interface: (i) in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, perform a first operation and provide via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation; (ii) in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, perform the first operation... and forgo providing at least a portion ofthe first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation: after performing the first operation, detect a second input of the first Ape on the home button; and in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button; (i) perform a second operation that is associated with the home button; and <ii) provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the

DK 2016 70738 A1 home button. without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

[00141 In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device. The method includes .' displaying a user interface on the display and, while displaying the user interface, detecting an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button. Detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button. In response to detecting the first press input on the home button.· (j) in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase In the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity ofthe contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric: (A) performing a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and {B) generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensit y of the contact above the first intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact, proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of the intensity-change metric· (A) performing the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and (B) generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe coniaet above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

[0015] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more tactile output generating units to generate tactile outputs, and one or more sensor units to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or

DK 2016 70738 A1 more tactile output generating units, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: display a user interface on the display; while displaying the user interface, detect an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact cm the home button; and in response to detecting the first press input on the home button: (i) in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensify of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric; (A) perform a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and (B) generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of fhe intensity-change metric; (A) perform the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and (B) generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds io the. increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

(0016] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at. an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device. The method includes: displaying a first user interface. While displaying the first user interface, the method includes detecting: (it a first press input on the home button; and (ii ) a second press input, on the home button that is detected after the first press input. In response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, providing a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile. The first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the

DK 2016 70738 A1 one or more tactile output generators, in. response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button, the method includes'. (1} in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a fsrst point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs; (A) performing a first operation associated with the first press input; and (8) providing a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, the second non-visual output providing feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output including tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and. (ii) in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first, point in time and the second point in time, that the first, press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern; (A) performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, and the second operation is different from the first operation; and (B) providing a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, and the third non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

[0Ö17] in accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more tactile output, generating units to generate tactile outputs, one or more sensor units to detect intensifies of contacts with a home button of the device; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or more tactile output generating units, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to; display a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, detect; (i) a first press input on the home button; and (ii) a second press input on the home button that is detected after the first press input; in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input., provide a first non-visual output with a first nonvisual output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; in response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button; (i) in

DK 2016 70738 A1 accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in t ime that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate it (A) perform a first operation associated with the first press input; and (B) provide a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and, (ii) in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern; (A) perform a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and (B) provide a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein the third non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

|(MH8| in accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensifies of contacts with a respective button of the device. The method includes: detecting an input on the respective button, and the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switc h that detects activation of the respective button when the respecti ve button is mechanically compressed. In response to detecting the input on the respective button, the method includes·, (i) in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, fhe activation criteria including a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respec tive intensity threshold in order for the activa tion criteria to be met, providing a first tactile output with, a first tactile output pattern that includes; (A) between 0.5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, and the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and (ii) in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, .forgoing providing the first tactile output.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [0019[ In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more tactile output generating units to generate tactile outputs, one or more sensor units to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit; the one or more tactile output, generating units, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: detect an input on the respective button, wherein the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation of the respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed; in response to detecting the input on the respective button: (t) in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, provide a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes: between 0,5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at. a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and (it) in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgo providing the first tactile output.

[0β20| fe accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, an intensity-sensitive button (e.g,, a virtual or physical home button), one or more processors, memory', and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or ca us ing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device io perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touchsensitive surface, an intensity-sensitive button (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), and

DK 2016 70738 A1 on an eleeironic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, an intensitysensitive button (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in fhe memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, an intensity-sensitive button (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of fhe methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, an intensity-sensitive button (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensiti ve surface, inc ludes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described, herein.

)0021 { Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a button of ihe device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), optionally one or more sensors to detect intensifies of contacts witli the touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, and optionally an audio system, are provided with improved methods and interfaces for providing feedback to a user during interaction with a button, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for providing haptic feedback to a user.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

109221 for a better understanding of the various described embodimeuts, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

)0023 j Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70738 A1 {0024J Figure 1.8 is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.

(0025] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments.

{0026] Figure 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.

(0027] Figures 2B-2C show exploded views of a force-sensitive input device in accordance with some embodiments.

(0028] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

]O029| Figure -4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

(0030] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments, (003.1] Figures 4C-4E illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.

{0032] Figures 4F-4G illustrate a set of sample tactile output patterns in accordance with some embodiments.

|0033i Figures 4H-4J illustrate example haptic audio output patterns versus time that are used in conjunction with tactile outputs to simulate button clicks in accordance with some embodiments.

(0034] Figure 4K illustrates example combinations of tactile output patterns and haptic audio output patterns versus time in accordance with some embodiments. Figures 4L4Q enlarge the combinations shown in Figure 4K for clarity.

(0035] Figures 5A1 -5 Al 8 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing haptic and visual feedback for button interaction in accordance with some embodiments.

{0036] Figures 5 BI-5B75 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing haptic and visual feedback for button interaction in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [0037] Figures 5C i ~5C 19 iilustrate exemplary user interface configuration process in accordance with some embodiments, a home button (0038] Figures 6A1-6B26 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for controlling user interface haptics and home button haptics in accordance with some embodiments.

[0039] Figures 7A-7G are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing visual feedback regarding activation of a user input device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0040] Figure 8 ts a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[004 J] Figures 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing visual feedback and tactile outputs in response to multiple types of inputs on a home button of a device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0042] Figure 10 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0043] Figures 11 A-1 IE are flow diagrams illustrating a method of home button configuration in accordance with some embodiments.

(0044] Figure 12 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0045( Fi gures 13 A-13D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of controlling user interface haptics and home button haptics in accordance with some embodiments, |0046j Figure 14 is a functional block diagram o f an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

10047( Figures 15A-15F are flow draurams illustrating a method of ueneratinu tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns depending on an input-based metric or a user interface-based metric in accordance with some embodiments.

[0048( Figure 16 is a functional block diagram o f an e lectronic device in accordance with some embodiments, [0049] Figures 17A-1.7D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing a different tactile output for a second click of a double click input than for a first click of the double click input in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [0050j Figure ! 8 is a bur w ith some éiiibodimen is.

ional block diagram ofan electronic device, in. accordance ('ØØSIl Figures 19A-19C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing discrete tactile outputs to indicate activat ion of a persistent non-mechanical button on a device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0052] Figure 20 is a funct ional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

DFSCRIFTION OF FM BODfM F NTS [0053[ Many electronic devices with displays include mechanical buttons, such as mechanical home buttons, to navigate between different user interfaces displayed on the electronic devices. But mechanical buttons provide little, if any, feedback to a user beyond a fixed down click and a fixed up click. Methods described herein provide visual, haptic, and/or audio feedback during interaction with a button (e.g., a virtual or physical home button) that make manipulation of user interfaces more efficient and intuitive for a user.

[0054] The methods, devices, and GUIs described herein use feedback to improve device-user interactions in multiple ways, including by:

• providing visual feedback regarding activation of a user input device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button);

• providing visual feedback and tactile outputs in response to multiple types of inputs on a borne button of a device;

• configuring the feedback provided by a home button;

» controlling user interface haptics and home button haptics;

• generating tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns depending on an input-based metric or a user interface-based metric;

• providing a different tactile output for a second click of a double click input than for a first click of the double click input; and • providing discrete tactile outputs to indicate activation of a persistent nonmechanical button on a device.

DK 2016 70738 A1 example devices [0055j Reference will now be made I« detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the vari ous described embodiments. However, it will be apparent, to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced, without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks ha ve not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

j0056{ It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, wi thout departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact, are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

[00571 The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limit ing. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possib le combin ations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms 'includes,” ‘'including,'’ “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.

|0058] As used herein, the term “if* is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected'’ is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to

DK 2016 70738 A1 determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or eventf’ or [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

in response to detecting [0Θ59] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and. associated processes for using such devices are described, in some embodiments, the device is a. portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and'or music player functions. Example embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple luc, of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g,, touch-screen displays and/or touchpads'), are. optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touchsensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).

[0060] in the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display aud a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.

[0061j The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

[00621 The various applications dun are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more lunctions o f the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface ) of the device optionally supports tlie variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

DK 2016 70738 A1 (ÖÖ63 j Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. Figure I A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive dispiay. Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interlace 11.8, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker .111, microphone 113, input/output (VO) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touchsensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device .100), Device 100 includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

10064] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g,, a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will he detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g,, a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), fire tactile output generated by the physical displacement will he interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of die device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g.., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a ''down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensiti ve surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as

DK 2016 70738 A1 ‘Toughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even, when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, diere are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception, of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click? “roughness”), unless otherwise staled, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. Using tactile outputs to provide hapticfeedback to a user enhances the operability of the device and makes die user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping die user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when opemting/Interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the de vice more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern specifies characteristics of a tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, die shape of a movement waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and or the duration of the tactile output.

|0066| When tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generators that move a moveable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactile outputs may invoke different haptic sensations in a user holding or touching the device. While the sensation of the user is based on die user’s perception of the tactile output, most users will be able to identify changes in waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactile outputs generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency and amplitude can be adjusted to indnate to the user that different operations have been performed. As such, tactile outputs with tactile output patterns that are designed, selected, and/or engineered to simulate characteristics (e.g., size, material, weight, stiffness, smoothness, etc.); behaviors (e.g., oscillation, displacement, acceleration, rotation, expansion, etc,); and/or Interactions (e.g., collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) of objects in a given environment (e.g., a user interface that includes graphical features and objects, a simulated physical environment with virtual boundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment with physical boundaries and physical objects, and/or a combination of any of the above) will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to

DK 2016 70738 A1 users thai reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of the user's operation ofthe device. Additionally, tactile outputs are, optionally, generated to correspond to feedback that is unrelated to a simulated physical characteristic, such as an input threshold or a selection of an object. Such tac tile outputs will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency ofthe user's operation ofthe device.

[0067] In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile output pattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in a user interface or behind the scenes in a device. Examples of the events of interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., a real or virtual button, or toggle switch) provided on the device or in a user interface, success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing a boundary in a user interface, entry into a new state, switching of input focus between objects, activation of a new mode, reaching or crossing an input dueshold, detec tion or recognition of a type of input or gesture, etc. in some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as a warning or an alert for an impending event or outcome that would occur unless a redirection or interruption input is timely detected. Tactile outputs are also used in other contexts to enrich the user experience, improve the accessibility ofthe device to users with visual or motor difficulties or other accessibility needs, and/or improve efficiency and functionality ofthe user interlace and/or the device. Tactile outputs are optionally accompanied with audio outputs and/or visible user interface changes, which further enhance a user’s experience when the user interacts with a user interface and/or the device, and facilitate better con veyance of information regarding the state of the user interface and/or the device, and which reduce input errors and increase the efficiency ofthe user’s operation ofthe device.

)00081 Figure 4F provides a set of sample tactile output patterns that may be used, either individually or in combination, either as is or through one or more transformations (e.g., modulation, amplification, truncation, etc.), to create suitable haptic feedback in various scenarios and for various purposes, such as those mentioned above and those described with respect to the user interfaces and methods discussed herein. This example of a palette of tactile outputs shows how a set of three waveforms and eight frequencies can be used to produce an array of taetiie output patterns. In addition to tire tactile output patterns shown in this figure, each of these tactile output patterns is optionally adjusted in amplitude

DK 2016 70738 A1 by changing a gain value for the tactile output pattern, as shown, for example for FullTap SOHz, FullTap 200Hz, MiniTap SOHz, MiniTap 200Hz, MicroTap 80Hz, and MicroTap 200Hz in Figure 4G, which are each shown with variants having a gain of 1.0,0,75, 0.5, and 0,25. As shown in Figure 4G, changing the gain of a tactile output pattern changes the amplitude ofthe pattern without changing the frequency ofthe pattern or changing the shape of the waveform, in some embodiments, changing the frequency of a tactile output pattern also results in a lower amplitude as some tactile output generators are limited by how much force can be applied to the moveable mass and thus higher frequency movements ofthe mass are constrained to lower amplitudes to ensure that tlie acceleration needed to create the waveform does not require force, outside of an operational force range ofthe tactile output generator (e.g., the peak amplitudes of the FullTap at 230Hz, 270Hz, and 300Hz are lower than the amplitudes of the Full Tap at 80Hz, 100Hz, 125Hz, and 200Hz).

10069] in Figure 4F, each column shows tactile output patterns that have a particular waveform. The waveform of a tactile output pattern represents the pattem of physical displacements relative to a neutral position (e.g., x_zew) versus time that an moveable mass goes through to generate a tactile output with that tactile output pattern. For example, a first set of tactile output patterns shown in the left column in Figure 4F te.g., tactile output patterns of a “FullTap”) each have a waveform drat includes an oscillation with two complete cycles {e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and crosses the neutral position three times). A second set of tactile output patterns shown in the middle column in Figure 4F (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “MiniTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation that includes one complete cycle (e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and crosses the neutral position one time). A third set of tactile output patterns shown in the right column in Figure 4F (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “MicroTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation that include one half of a complete cycle (e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and does not cross the neutral position). The waveform of a tactile output pattern also includes a start buffer and an end buffer that represent the gradual speeding up and slowing down ofthe moveable mass at the start and at the end of the tactile output. The example waveforms shown in Figure 4F-4G include and x«sx values which represent the maximum and minimum extent of movement ofthe moveable mass. For larger electronic devices with larger moveable masses, there may be larger or smaller minimum and maximum extents of

DK 2016 70738 A1 movement of the mass. The example shown m Figures 4F-4G describes movement of a mass in 1 dimension, however similar principles would also apply to movement of a moveable mass in two or three dimensions.

(0070] As shown in Figure 4F, each tactile output pattern also has a corresponding characteristic frequency that, affects the “pitch” of a hapt ic sensation that, is felt by a user from a tactile output with that characteristic frequency. For a continuous tactile output, the characteristic frequency represents the number of cycles that are completed within a. given period of time (e.g., cycles per second) by the moveable mass of the tactile output generator. For a discrete tactile output, a discrete output signal (e.g,, with 0.5, 1, or 2 cycles) is generated, and the characteristic frequency value specifies how fast the moveable mass needs to move to generate a tactile output with that characteristic frequency. As shown in Figure 4F, for each type of tactile output (e g., as defined by a respective waveform, such as Full'fap, MiniTap, or Micro Tap), a higher frequency value corresponds to faster movements) by the moveable mass, and hence, in general, a shorter time to complete the tactile output (e.g., including the time to complete the required number of eyelets) for the discrete tactile output, plus a start and an end buffer time). For example, a FullTap with a characteristic frequency of 80Hz takes longer to complete than FullTap with a characteristic frequency of 100Hz (e.g., 35,4ms vs, 28,3ms hi Figure 4F). In addition, for a given frequency, a tactile output with more cycles in its waveform at a. respective frequency takes longer to complete than a tactile output with fewer cycles its waveform at the same respective frequency. For example, a FullTap at 150Hz takes longer to complete than a MiniTap at 150Hz (e.g., 19.4ms vs. 12.8ms), and a MiniTap at 150Hz takes longer to complete than a. MicroTap at 150Hz (e.g., 12.8ms vs, 9.4ms). However, for tactile output patterns with different frequencies this rule may not apply (e.g., tactile outputs with more cycles but a higher frequency may take a shorter amount of time to complete than tactile outputs with fewer cycles but a lower frequency, and vice versa). For example, at 300Hz, a FullTap takes as long as a MiniTap (e.g , 9.9 ins!.

|0071J As shown in Figure 4F, a tactile output pattern also has a characteristic amplitude that affec ts the amount of energy that is contained in a tac til e signa l , or a “strength” of a haptic sensation that may be felt by a user through a tactile output with that characteristic amplitude. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern refers to an absolute or normalized value that represents the maximum

DK 2016 70738 A1 displacement of the moveable mass from a neutral position when generating the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern is adjustable, e.g,, by a fixed or dynamically determined gain factor (e.g,, a value between 0 and I), in accordance with various conditions (e.g,, customized based on user interface contexts and behaviors) and/or preconfigured metrics (e.g., input-based metrics, and/or user-intertace-based metrics). In some embodiments, an input-based metric (e.g., an intensity-change metric or an input-speed metric > measures a characteristic ofan input (e.g., a rate of change of a characteristic intensity of a contact in a press input or a rate of movement of the contact across a touch-sensitive surface) during the input that triggers generation of a tactile output. In some embodiments, a user-interface-based metric (e.g., a speed-across-boundary metric) measures a characteristic of a user interface element, (e.g., a speed of movement of fhe element across a hidden or visible boundary in a user interface) during the user interface change that triggers generation of the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern may be modulated by an “en velope” and fhe peaks of adjacent cycles may have different amplitudes, where one of the waveforms shown above is further modified by multiplication by an envelope parameter that changes over time (e.g., from 0 to 1) to gradually adjust amplitude of portions of tfc tactile output over time as the tactile output is being generated.

[0072-1 Although specific frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms are represented in the sample tactile output patterns in Figure 4F for illustrative purposes, tactile output patterns with other frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms may be used for similar purposes. For example, waveforms that have between 0.5 to 4 cycles can be used. Other frequencies in the range of 60Hz-400Flz may be used as well. Table 1. provides examples of particular haptic feedback behaviors, configurations, and examples of their use.

Table 1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
User Interface Haptics
Retarget Default	MicroTap High (270Hz) rtrtio· A 4	Drag calendar event across day boundary
Retarget in force press quick action menu

	Minimum	Sliding over origin point in a scrubber
	Reaching 0 degrees when cropping/straightening

DK 2016 70738 A1

	Interval: 0.05	Rearranging a list when items snap together
Retarget Strong	MicroTap High (2'70Hz) Gain; 0,5 Minimum Inten· ah 0,05	Retarget in A-Z scrubber
Retarget Picker	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain; 0,4 Minimum interval; 0.05	Spinning a wheel in foe wheels of time user interface


impact Default	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max; 0.8 Gain min; 0.0	Changing scrubbing speed when adjusting a slider
Creating a new calendar event by tapping and holding
Activating a toggle switch (changing foe switch from on to off or off to on)
Reaching a predefined orientation on a compass (e.g,, every 45 degrees from North)
Reaching a level state (e.g., 0 degrees tilt in any axis for 0.5 seconds)
Dropping a pin in a map
Sending or receiving a message with an emphasis animation (e.g., “slam” effect)
Sending or receiving an acknowledgment of a message
Snapping a ruler to different orientations (e.g., every 45 degrees)
Crossing over a suggested photo while scrubbing through a burst of photos
Crossing over a detent in a scrubber (e.g., text size, haptic strength, display brightness, display color temperature)
Transaction failure notification (ApplePay Failure)
Impact Light	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 0.6	Picking up an existing item (e.g., a calendar event, a favorite in web browser)
Moving a time selector over a minor division of time (e.g., 15 min) in sleep alarm

DK 2016 70738 A1

	Gain min: Ö.Ö
impact Strong	MieroTap Medium (150 Hz) Gain max: 1.0 Gain min: 0.0	Moving a time selector over a major division of time (e.g,, 1 hour) in sleep alarm
Edge Scrubber	MieroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 0.6 Gain min: 0.3	Dragging a brightness scrubber to an edge of the scrubber
Dragging a volume scrubber to an edge of the scrubber

Edge Zoom	MieroTap High (270Hz) Gain; 0,6	Reaching maximum zoom level when zooming into a photo
Re-centering a map
Drag Default	MieroTap High (270Hz) Gain Pickup: TO Gain Drop: 0.6	Pickup and drop an event in calendar


Drag Snapping	MieroTap High (270Hz) Gain Pickup; 1.0 Gain Drop; 0,6 Gain Snap; 1.0	Rearrange lists in weather, contacts, music, etc.
States Swipe Action	Swipe in: MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain: TO Swipe out: MieroTap High (270Hz) Gam; 0,55	Swipe to delete a mail message or conversation
Swipe to mark a mail message as read/unread in mail
Swipe to delete a table row (e.g., a document in a document creation/viewing application, a note in a notes application, a location in a weather application, a podcast in a podcast application, a song in a playlist in a music application, a voice memo in a voice recording application
Swipe to delete a message while displaying a pressure-triggered preview
Swipe to mark a message as read/unread while displaying a pressure-triggered preview
Swipe to delete a news article

DK 2016 70738 A1

		Swipe to favorite lose a new $ article
Button Default	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain; 0.9	Reply to message conversation
Adding a bookmark in an electronic book reader application
Activating a virtual assistant
Starting to record a voice memo
Stopping recording a voice memo
Button Destructive	Mini Tap Low (100Hz) Feedback intensity.· 0.8	Delete message/conversatlon
Event Success	FuliTap Medinin (200Hz) Gain; 0,7 MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain; 1,0	Confirmation that a payment has been made
Alert that authentication is needed to make a payment (e.g,, biometric authentication or passcode authentication)
Adding a payment account to an electronic wallet application
Event Error	MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain; 0,85 Gain; 0.75 FuliTap Medium (200Hz) Gain; 0,65 FuliTap Low (150Hz) Gain; 0,75	Failure to process a payment transaction
Failure to authenticate a fingerprint detected on a fingerprint sensor
Incorrect passcode/password entered in a passeotle/password entry UI

Ί7

DK 2016 70738 A1

Event Warning	FullTap High (300Hz) Gain: 0.9 FullTap Custom (270Hz) Gain; 0,9	Shake to undo
Force Press
States Preview	MicroTap Custom (200Hz) Gain; 1.0	Peek/Preview (e.g., peek at a mail message)
States Preview	FullTap Custom (150Hz) Gain; 1.0	Pop/Commit (e.g,, pop into full mail message)
States Preview	MicroTap Custom (200Hz) Gain: 1.0	Unavailable (e.g,, press hard on an app icon that doesn ’t have any associated quick actions)
System Haptics
Device Locked	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain; 1.0 MiniTap Medium (150Hz) Gain: 1,0	Press power button once to lock device
Vibe on Attach	Vibe at 150Hz that gradually increases or decreases hi amplitude over time	Attach device to power source

DK 2016 70738 A1

Ringtones & Alerts	Custom tactile output using one or more of	Receive phone call or text message
	Vibe 150Hz MicroTap 150Hz MiniTap 150Hz FullTap 150Hz
Solid-State Home Button
1 (“Tick”)	MiniTap 230Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button with click option 1 selected
2 (“Tak”)	MiniTap 270Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button wi th click option 2 selected
3 (“lock”)	MiniTap 300Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button with click option 3 selected

The examples shown above in Table 1 are intended to illustrate a range of circumstances in which tactile outputs can be generated for different inputs and events.

Table ί should not be taken as a requirement that a device respond to each of the listed inputs or events with fhe indicated tactile output. Rather, Table 1 is intended to illustrate how tactile outputs vary and/or are simitar for different inputs and/or events (e.g., based on the tactile output pattern, frequency, gain, etc.). For example Table 1 shows how an “event success” tactile output varies from an “event failure” tactile output and how a retarget tactile output differs from an impact tactile output.

(00741 Figures 4H-4J illustrate example haptic audio output patterns versus time that are used in conjunction with tactile outputs to simulate button clicks in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [0075 j figure 4K illustrates example combinations of tactile output patterns and haptic audio output patterns versus time in accordance with some embodiments. Figures 4L4Q enlarge the combinations shown in Figure 4K for clarity.

|0076] in Figure 411, the top haptic audio pattern “Click Al audio⁵’ is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown in Figure 4K (first row in the First Click column) and the upper portion of Figure 4L, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact, at a control activation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact, is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “Click Al audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) tactile output by 2 ms . in some cases , the same “Click A1 audio” and “Click A” Normal .MiniTap (230Hz) are played to simulate the first ηρ-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click Al audio” and'or “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the upclick relative to the preceding down-click.

(ÖÖ77J The top haptic audio pattern “Click Al audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “soft” first click, as shown In Figure 4K (second row in the First Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 4L, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g,, the contact is making a soft” anchor slow press). To simulate a “soft:” down-click, the gain of the “Click Ai audio” and “Click Λ” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” downclick. In this example, “Click Al audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Flz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same “Click A1 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) are played to simulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click Al audio” and/or “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to the preceding downLn Figure 4H, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click A2 audio” is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) to Simulate a second dow n-click in a “normal'' second click that, follows the first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a double click input), as shown in

DK 2016 70738 A1

Figure 4K (first row in ihe Second Click column) and the upper portion of Figure 4M. where the rate of change of intensity of a contact ai a control activation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact in the second click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “Click A2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. in some eases, the same “(Nick A2 audio” and “Click .A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) are played to simulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In some eases, the gain of the “Click Ä2 audio” and/or “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g,, by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding second down-click.

)0079) The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click A2 audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) to simulate a second down-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click, within a predetermined period of time (e.g,, as the second click in a double click input), as shown in Figure 4K (second row in the Second Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 4M, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a '‘soft” and'or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click A2 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap {230Hzj are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. In this example, “Click Å2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same “Click A2 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) are played to simulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click A2 audio” and/or “Click A” Soft Mini Tap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding second down-click.

)0080) In Figure 4L the top haptic audio pattern “Click Bi audio” is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown in Figure 4K (third row in the First Click column) and the upper portion of Figure 4N , where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “Click BI audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B” N ormal MiniTap (270Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same “Click BI audio” and “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) are played to simulate the fest up-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain of tire “Click BI

DK 2016 70738 A1 audio” and/or “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz.) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the upclick relative to the preceding down-click.

tic audio pattern “Click BI audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “soft first click as shown in Figure 4K (fourth row in the First Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 4N, where the rate of change of intensity ofa contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click BI audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) are reduced (e.g,, by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” downclick·. In this example, “Click BI audio” is offset from the start of the “(flick B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) tactile output by 2,8 ms. in some cases, the same “Click BI audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz.) are played to simulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click, in some cases, the gain of die “Click .81 audio’'' and/or “(/lick B” Soft MiniTap (230Hz) ate reduced (e.g,, by 50%) in die up-click relative to the preceding downclick.

10082 j in Figure 41, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click B2 audio” is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) to simulate a second down-click in a. “normal” second click that follows the first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g,, as the second click, in a double click, input), as shown in Figure 4K (third row in the Second Click column) and the upper portion of Figure 40, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact in the second click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “Click 82 audio” is offset from the start of the “'Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same “Click B2 audio” and “Click B” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) are played to simulate the second up-elick that follows the second down-click, in some cases , the gain of the “Click B2 audio” and/or “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding second down-click.

10083 j The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click B2 audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click B” Soft Mini lap (270H.z) to simulate a second down-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g., as

DK 2016 70738 A1 the second dick in. a double dick input), as shown in Figure 4K (fourth row in the Second Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 40. where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Cidick B2 audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%I in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click, in this example, “Click 82 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same “Click B2 audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) are played to simulate the second ηρ-click that follows the second down-click, in some cases, the gain of the “Click B2 audio” and/or “Click 8” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding second down-click.

(0084] In Figure 4J, the top haptic audio pattern “Click Cl audio” is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown in Figure 4K (fifth row in the First Click column) and the upper portion of Fi gure 4P, where the rate of ch ange of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g.. the contact is narking a “normal” hard, fast press). In this example, “(flick Cl audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same “Click Cl audio” and “Click C” Normal M iniTap (300Hz) are played to simulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click Cl audio” and/or “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the upclick relative to the preceding down-click.

[0085] The top haptic audio pattern “Click. Ci audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) to simulate a first down-click in a “soft” first click, as shown in Figure 4K (sixth row in the First Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 4P, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click C l audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” downclick. in this example, “Click Cl audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same “Click Cl audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (270Hz) are played to simulate the first up-click that follows the

DK 2016 70738 A1 •first down-click, in some cases, the gain of the “Click CI audio” and/or “Click Ü” Soft MiniTap {30011/.) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in die up-cliek relative to the preceding down10086] In Figure 4j, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click C2 audio” is audio output that is played conjunction with “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) to simulate a second down-click in a “normal” second click that follows the first click within a predetennined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a double click input), as shown in Figure 4K (fifth row in the Second Click column) and the upper portion of Figure 4Q, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is above a thresho ld rate of change (e.g., the contact in the second click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “Click C2 audio” is offset front the start of the “Click C” Normal MiniTap (30011/.) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same “Click. C2 audio” and “Click C” Normal Mini Tap (300.1-lz) are played to simulate tire second up-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click C2 audio” and/or “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-cliek relative to the preceding second down-click.

[O087j The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click C2 audio” is also played in conjunction with “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) to simulate a second down-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click within a predetennined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a double click input), as shown in Figure 4K (sixth row in the Second Click column) and the lower portion of Figure 4Q, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact, at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/or slow press). To simulate a “'soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click C2 audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. In this example, “Click C2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms, In some cases, the same “Click C2 audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) are played to simulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases, the gain of the “Click C2 audio” and/or “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding second down-click.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [ÖÖ88J It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in Figure IA are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, ora combination thereof, inchiding one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

[00891 Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, such as CPll(s) 120 and the peripherals interface 118, is. optionally, controlled by memory' controller 122.

100901 Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 1.00 and to process data.

100911 In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memory controiler 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104, In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

(00921 RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via foe electromagnetic signals, RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry·' 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WW'W), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (L AN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. includnux but not limited to Global System for .Mobile Communications .35'·

DK 2016 70738 A1 (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (FISUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPD.A), long term evolution (LTB), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMÄ), code division multiple access (CDMA), tune division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth. Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) te.g., IEEE SON Ila. IEEE 802, Uac, IEEE 802. H ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.1 Ig and/or IEEE 802.1 tn), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), WEM AX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), instant Messaging and Presence Sendee (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Sendee (SM S), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

|0093| Audio circuitry 11Ö, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interlace i 18, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker ill. Speaker 111 converts ihe electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 11.3 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry .108 by peripherals interface 118. in some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g,, 212, Figure 2.A), The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g,, a microphone).

|0094| I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device .100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116, with peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 reeeive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116.

DK 2016 70738 A1

The other input or control devices 116 optionally inc hide physical buttons (e g.. push buttons, rocker buttons, etc,}, dials, slider switches, joysticks,, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.. 208, Figure 2Ä) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button te.g.. 206, Figure 2A).

(0095] Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interlace between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals frorn/to touch-sensitive display system 112 Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visua. output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed ‘'graphics'·’).

In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” is a user-interactive graphical riser interface (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interacti ve graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other riser interface control.

(0096( Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touchsensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and'Or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interfece objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In an example embodiment, a point of contact between touch-sensiti ve display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.

(0097( Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (Liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other

DK 2016 70738 A1 embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112. in an example embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple luc. of Cupertino, California.

Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. in some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touchsensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth, in some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen, in some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cnrsor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

|0099| In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touchsensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

|00100| Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g.. battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a lightemitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.

[001011 Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. Figure IA shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem as

DK 2016 70738 A1 i 06. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (OOD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touchsensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc,).

[00102] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact Intensity sensors 165. Figure 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensiiy sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact Intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensiiy sensors (e.g.. sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touchsensitive surface). Contact intensity sensorfs) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g,, pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touchscreen dispiay system 112 which is located on the front of device 100.

[00103] Device 100 optionally also incl udes one or more proximity sensors 166. Figure 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 11.2 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[00104] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. Figure 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller 161

DK 2016 70738 A1 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator!s) 162 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e g.. a component, that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback moduie 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100, in some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100), In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system .112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[00105} Device 100 optionally also meludes one or more accelerometers 168. Figure 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is,, optionally, coupled with an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data recei ved from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionaiiy includes, in addition to accelerometer's) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.

[00106} In some embodiments, the soft ware components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) .130, graphics moduie (or set of instructions)

132, haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions) .134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions ) 136, Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in Figures 1A and 3, Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of; active appiication state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other

DK 2016 70738 A1 information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, including information obtained fron? the device's various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and location andor positional information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.

'(00107] Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more externai ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g.. Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., foe Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the externai port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with fhe 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®;, iPod Touch'®, and iPad®) devices from Apple inc, of Cupertino, California, In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and er compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

(00109] Contaet/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel), Contaet/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contaet/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the

DK 2016 70738 A1 point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed {magnitude! velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magn i tude and/or direct ion) of the point of contact. These operations ate, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts {e.g , 'hnuititouclf'/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

(00.11.0( Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g,, diffeieut motions, timings, and/or .intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus.

(00111( In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on the length of time between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event, but is independent of the intensity of the finger contact bet ween detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected in accordance with a determination that the length of time between the finger-down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g,, less than 0,1,0,2,0,3,0,4 or 0,5 seconds), independent of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light press or deep press intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tap gesture can satisfy particular input criteria that do not require that the characteristic intensity of a contact satisfy a given intensity threshold in order for the particular input criteria to be met. For clarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to satisfy a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold, below which the contact is not detected, in order for the finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or other contact, in cases where

DK 2016 70738 A1 the device is capable of detecting a finger or Stylus contact hovering over a touch sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch sensitive surface.

('00112] The same concepts apply in an analogous manner to other types of gestures. For example, a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a depinch gesture, and/or a long press gesture are optionally detected based on the satisfaction of criteria that are either independent of intensities of contacts included in the gesture, or do not require that contact(s) that perform the gesture reach intensity thresholds in order to be recognized. For example., a swipe gesture is detected based on an amount of movement of one or more contacts; a pinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts towards each other; a depinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts away from each other; and a long press gesture is detected based on a duration of the contact on the touchsensitive surface with less than a threshold amount of movement. As such, the statement that particular gesture recognition criteria do not require that the intensity of the contacts) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met means that the particular gesture recognition criteria are capable of being satisfied if the contaetfs) in the gesture do not reach the respective intensity threshold, and are also : of being satisfied in circumstances where one or more of the contacts in the gesture do reach or exceed the respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected based on a determination that the finger-down and finger-up event are detected within a predefined time period, without regard to whether the contact is above or below the respective intensity threshold during the predefined time period, and a swipe gesture is detected based on a determination that the contact movement is greater than a predefined magnitude, even if the contact is above the respective intensity threshold at the end of the contact movement. Even in implementations where detection of a gesture is influenced by the intensities of contacts performing the gesture (e.g., the device detects a long press more quickly when the intensity of the contact is above an intensity threshold or delays detection of a tap input when the intensity ofthe contact is higher), the detection, of those gestures does not require that tire contacts reach a particular intensity threshold so long as the criteria for recognizing the gesture can be met in circumstances where the contact does not reach the particular intensity threshold (e.g., even if the amount of time that it takes to recognize the gesture changes).

DK 2016 70738 A1 [ÖÖ1 ί31 Contact intensity thresholds, duration thresholds, and movement thresholds are, in some circumstances, combined in a variety of different combinations in order to create heuristics for distinguishing two or more different gestures directed to the same input element or region so that multiple different interactions with the same input element are enabled to provide a richer set of user interactions and responses The statement that a particular set of gesture recognition criteria do not require that the intensity of the contactis) meet a respective intensity threshold in order tor the particular gesture recognition criteria to he met does not preclude the concurrent evaluation of other intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria to identify other gestures that do have a criteria that is met when a gesture includes a contact with an intensity above the respective intensity threshold. For example, in some circumstances, first gesture recognition criteria for a first gesture - which do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met - are in competition with second gesture recognition criteria for a second gesture -- which are dependent on the contact's) reaching the respective intensity threshold. In such competitions, the gesture is, optionally, not. recognized as meeting the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture if the second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are met first. For example, if a contact reaches the respective intensity threshold before the contact moves by a predefined amount of movement, a deep press gesture is detected rather than a swipe gesture. Conversely, if the contact moves by fee predefined amount of movement before the contact reaches fee respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture is delected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such circumstances, the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture still do not require that the intensity of the contactis) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met because if the contact stayed below the respective intensity threshold until an end of the gesture (e.g.. a swipe gesture with a contact that does not increase to an intensity above the respective intensity threshold), the gesture would have been recognized by fee first gesture recognition criteria as a swipe gesture. As such, particular gesture recognition criteria feat do not require that the intensity of fee contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met will (A) in some circumstances ignore ihe intensity of the contact wife respect to fee Intensity threshold (e.g. for a tap gesture) and/or (B) In some circumstances still be dependent on fee intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity

DK 2016 70738 A1 threshold in ihe sense thai the particular gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a long press gesture) will tail if a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognize an input as corresponding to an intensity-dependent gesture before the particular gesture recognition criteria recognize a gesture corresponding to the input (e.g., for a long press gesture that is competing with a deep press gesture for recognition).

[00114) Graphics module 132 Includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation., contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and ihe like.

[00115] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc,, one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to dispiay controller 156, [00116) Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.

)00117) Text, input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140,1M 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input), [00118] GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as piemre/video metadata, and to applications that provide locationbased services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

DK 2016 70738 A1 [ÖÖ119) Applications 136 optionally include the following modules {'or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof * contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

• telephone module 138;

• video conferencing module 139;

• e-mail client module 140;

♦ instant messaging (IM) module 141;

• workout support module 142;

♦ camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

♦ image management module 144;

• browser module 147;

• calendar module 148;

• widget modules 149, which optionally inelnde one or more of: weather widget 1491, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 1.49-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as usercreated widgets 149-6;

♦ widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;

* search module 151;

* video and music player module 152, which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;

• notes module .153;

* map module 154, and/or » online video module 155.

[00120) Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory

102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00121j In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module ί 32, and text input module 134. contacts module 137 includes executable mstruetions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored, in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including, adding name(sl to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address hook; associating telephone numbers), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138, video conference 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; and so ibtth [061221 In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, [001231 In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 11I, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 11.2, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, coniaet module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and telephone modale 138, videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

[00124] in conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module

I34, e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In. conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00125I In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system J12. display controller 156. contact module i 30, graphics module 132, and text input module

134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message. Service (SMS) or .Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol tor telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP. SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification'Service ( APNs) or IM PS for Iniemetbaaed instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant, messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g,, messages sent using S MS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS).

(00120] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map moduie 1.54, and music player module 146, workout support module

142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.R., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data.

100127] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 1.12, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) .164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory 102.

JOOI28| in conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller

156. contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module

143, imaue management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange. modifv (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.

4S

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00129| In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system J12. display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[00130[ in conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 312, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client, module 140. and browser module 147. calendar module .148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

[00131[ In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 1.49 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 1.49-1, stocks widget 1492, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created, by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript tile. In some embodiments, a widget, includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[00132] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a. web page into a.

widget).

[00133[ In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text Input module 134, search module .151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and'or other files tn memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[00134] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry' 110, speaker 111

DK 2016 70738 A1

RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147. video and music player module i 52 includes executable instructions that allow tire user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more trie formats, such as MP3 or AAC tries, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touchsensitive display system 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 12-4). in some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an IPod (trademark of Apple Inc,).

(00.135( in conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

(00136( in conjunction with Rf circuitry 108. touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 1.30, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

(00137( In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry’ 110, speaker ill, RF circuitry IOS, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g.. by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140. is used to send a link to a particular online video.

(00.138( Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus so

DK 2016 70738 A1 various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments, in some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

)00139) In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input, control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

)00140) The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces, in some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. in such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad, )00141) Figure IB is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in Figures 1 A) or 370 (Figure 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g,, in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-.1 (e.g.. any of the aforementioned applications .136, 137-155, 380-390).

)00142) Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deli ver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174, in some embodiments, application .136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used hy event, sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.

DK 2016 70738 A1

I00143I In. some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of; resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1. and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

(001441 Event monitor 171 receives event information irom peripherals interface

1.18. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touchsensitive display system 112, as part ofa multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits itt formation it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometers) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry I S0>. Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

1001451 In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interlace 1 '18 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information, in other embodiments, peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g,, receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration ), |00146| In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.

f00147| Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touchsensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

|00148j Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called tlie hit view, and the set of

DK 2016 70738 A1 events thai are recognized as proper inputs are. optionaliy, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that beams a touch-based gesture.

('00149} Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to subevents of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit. view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was .identified as the hit view.

(001 SO] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

(00151] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g,, event recognizer 180), fn embodiments including active event recognizer detennination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event Information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173, In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module 182.

(00.152] in some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter .170.

Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a. part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00153] In. some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191. each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of tlie application’s user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers

180. Typically, a respective application view- 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers ISO, in other embodimenis, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface hit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodimenis, a respective event handler 190 Includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177 or GUI updater Γ78 to update the application internal state 192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 includes one or more respective event handlers 190, Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

[00Ϊ54] A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170, and identities an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).

[00155] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 1.70. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event infortnation also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed aud direction of the sub-event.

In some embodiments, e vents include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[00156] Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based ou the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or

DK 2016 70738 A1 determines or updates the state of an event or suh-eveni. In some embodiments, event comparator i<84 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching, in one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predeterm ined phase, a mo vement of the touch across touchsensitive display system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments.

the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[00157) In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an e\ ent tor a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 pet forms a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view In which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display sy stem 112, e vent comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three useriuterfece objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the resul t of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects au event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

[00158) In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event Information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type, [00159) When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of subevents do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event ss

DK 2016 70738 A1 recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended slate, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture, in this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain ac tive for the hit view continue to track and process subevents of an ongoing touch-b gesture.

|G016fl{ In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties. Hags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event, delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[00161 j in some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a. respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a. respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event Ständler 1 ^!>0 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

[00162] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions .188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery-' instructions deliver event Information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

[00163] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a. video file used in video player module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1, For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position ofa user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178

DK 2016 70738 A1 prepares display information and sends ii to graphics module sensitive display.

for display on a touch[0Θ164] In some embodiments, event handlens) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object, upda ter 177, and GUI upda ter 178 are included in a single module of a respeciive application 136-.1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[00165] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with Input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric Inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

[00166] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, I/O subsystem 106 (e.g,, haptic feedback controller 161 (Figure IA) and/or other input controller^) 160 (Figure 1 A)) includes at least some of the example components shown in Figure 1C. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 1.18 includes at least some of the example components shown in Figure 1C.

[00167] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback module 133. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 aggregates and combines tactile outputs for user interface feedback from software applications on the electronic device (e.g., feedback that, is responsive to user inputs that correspond to displayed user interfaces and alerts and other notifications that indicate the performance of operations or occurrence of events in user interfaces of the electronic device). Haptic feedback module 133 includes one or more of: waveform module 123 (for providing waveforms used for generating tactile outputs), mixer 125 (tor mixing waveforms, such as waveforms in different channels), compressor 127 (for reducing or compressing a dynamic range of the waveforms), low-pass filter 129 (for filtering out high frequency signal components in the

DK 2016 70738 A1 waveforms), and thermal controller 131 (for adjusting the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions). In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 is included in tic feedback controller 161 (Figure I A), in some embodiments, a separate unit of haptic module 133 (or a separate implementation of haptic· feedback module 133) is also included in an audio controller (e.g., audio circuitry 1 10, Figure I Ai and used for generating audio signals. In some embodiments, a single haptic feedback module 133 is used for generating audio signals and generating waveforms for tactile outputs.

(00.168( in some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 also includes trigger module 121 (e.g,, a software application, operating system, or other software module that determines a tactile output is to be generated and initiates the process for generating the corresponding tactile output), in some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals for initiating generation of waveforms (e.g., by waveform module 123). For example, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals based on preset tuning criteria. In some embodiments, trigger module 121 receives trigger signals from outside haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., in some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 receives trigger signals from hardware input processing module 146 located outside haptic feedback module 133) and relays the trigger signals to other components within haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., waveform module 123) or software applications that trigger operations (e.g., with trigger module 121) based on activation of the hardware input device (e.g., a home button), in some embodiments, trigger module 121 also receives tactile feedback? generation instructions (e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, Figures 1A and 3). in some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals in response to haptic feedback module 133 (or trigger module 12.1 in haptic feedback module 133) receiving tactile feedback instructions (e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, Figures 1A and 3).

(00169( Waveform module 123 receives trigger signals (e.g., from trigger module

121) as an input, and in response to receiving trigger signals, provides waveforms for generation of one or more tactile outputs (e.g., waveforms selected from a predefined set of waveforms designated for use by waveform module 123, such as the waveforms described in greater detail below with reference to Figures 4P-4G), {00170( Mixer .125 receives waveforms (e.g., from waveform module 123) as an input, and mixes together the waveforms. For example, when mixer 125 receives two or

5$

DK 2016 70738 A1 more waveforms (e.g., a first waveform in a first channel and a second waveform that at least partially overlaps with the first waveform in a second channel) mixer 125 outputs a combined waveform that corresponds to a sura of the two or more waveforms, in some embodiments, mixer 125 also modifies one or more waveforms ofthe two or more waveforms io emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest ofthe two or more waveforms (e.g,, by increasing a scale ofthe particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale ofthe rest of the waveforms), In some circumstances, mixer 125 selects one or more waveforms to remove from the combined waveform (e.g., the waveform from the oldest source is dropped when there are waveforms from more than three sources that ha ve been requested to be output concurrently by tactile output generator 167) )00171) Compressor 127 receives waveforms (e.g., a combined waveform from mixer 125) as an input, and modifies the waveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces the waveforms (e.g., in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generators 167 (Figure I A) or 357 (Figure 3)) so that tactile outputs corresponding to the waveforms are reduced. In some embodiments, compressor 127 limits the waveforms, such as by enforcing a predefined maximum amplitude for the waveforms. For example, compressor 127 reduces amplitudes of portions of waveforms that exceed a predefined amplitude threshold while maintaining amplitudes of portions of waveforms that do not exceed the predefined amplitude threshold. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces a dynamic range of the wa veforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 dynamically reduces the dynamic range of the waveforms so that, the combined waveforms remain within performance specifications of the tactile output generator 167 (e.g., force and/or moveable mass displacement limits).

)00172) Low-pass filter 129 receives waveforms (e.g., compressed waveforms from compressor 127) as an input, and filters (e.g., smooths) the waveforms (e.g., removes or reduces high frequency signal components in the waveforms). For example, in some instances, compressor 127 includes, in compressed waveforms, extraneous signals (e.g., high frequency signal components) that interfere with the generation of tactile outputs and/or exceed performance specifications of tactile output generator 167 when the tactile outputs are generated in accordance with the compressed waveforms. Low-pass filter 129 reduces or removes such extraneous signals in the waveforms.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [001731 Thermal controller 131 receives waveforms (e.g., filtered waveforms Ironi low-pass filter 129) aa an input, and adjusts the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions of device 100 (e.g·., based on internal temperatures detected within device 100, such as the temperature of haptic feedback controller 161, and/or external temperatures detected by device 100). For example, in some eases, the output of haptic feedback controller 161 varies depending on the temperature (e.g. haptic feedback controller 161, in response to recei ving same waveforms, generates a first tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a first temperature and generates a second tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a second temperature that Is distinct from the first temperature). For example, the magnitude (or th.e amplitude) of the tactile outputs may vary depending on the temperature. To reduce the effect of the temperature variations, the waveforms are modified (e.g., an amplitude of the waveforms is increased or decreased based on the temperature).

1.00174] hi some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 (e.g,, trigger module 121) is coupled to hardware input processing module 146. In some embodiments, other input controller(s) 160 in Figure IA includes hardware input processing module 146. in some embodiments, hardware input processing module 146 receives inputs from hardware input device 145 (e.g., other input or control devices 116 in Figure 1 A, such as a home button). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 is any input device described herein, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 (Figure IA), keyboard/mouse 350 (Figure 3). touchpad 355 (Figure 3), one of other input or control devices 116 (Figure I A), or an intensity-sensitive home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 2B or a home button with a mechanical actuator as illustrated in Figure 2C). in some embodiments, hardware input device 145 consists of an intensity-sensitive home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 2B or a home button with a mechanical actuator as illustrated in Figure 2C), and not touch-sensitive display system 112 (Figure 1 A), keyboard/mouse 350 (Figure 3), or touchpad 355 (Figure 3) In some embodiments, in response to inputs from hardware input device 145, hardware input processing module 146 provides one or more trigger signals to haptic feedback module 133 to indicate that a user input satisfying predefined input criteria, such as an input corresponding to a “click” of a home button (e.g., a “do wn click” or an “up click”), has been detected, in some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 provides waveforms that

DK 2016 70738 A1 correspond to the “chck” of a home button in response to the input corresponding to the “click” of a home button, simulating a haptic feedback of pressing a physical home button.

[00175] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g. , haptic feedback controller 161 in Figure 1A), which controls the generation of tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to a plurality of tactile output generators, and selects one or more tactile output generators of the plurality of tactile output genera tors and sends waveforms to the selected one or more tactile output generatom for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 coordinates tactile output requests that correspond to activation of hardware input device 145 and tactile output requests that correspond to software events (e.g.. tactile output requests from haptic feedback module 133) and modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms, such as to prioritize tactile outputs that correspond to activations of hardware input device 145 over tactile outputs that correspond to software events).

(00.176] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 1C, an output of haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled ίο audio circuitry of device 100 (e.g., audio circuitry 110, Figure 1A), and provides audio signals to audio circuitry of device 100. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 provides both waveforms used for generating tactile outputs and audio signals used for providing audio outputs in conjunction with generation of the tactile outputs. in some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 modifies audio signals and/or waveforms (used for generating tactile outputs) so that the audio outputs and the tactile outputs are synchronized (e.g,, by delaying the audio signals and/or waveforms). In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 includes a digitahto-analog converter used for converting digital waveforms into analog signals, which are received by amplifier 163 and/or tactile output generator 167,

100177] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes amplifier 163. In some embodiments, amplifier 163 receives waveforms (e.g., from haptic feedback controller 161) and amplifies the waveforms prior to sending the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167 (e.g., any of tactile output generators 167 (Figure 1A) or 357

DK 2016 70738 A1 (Figure 3)). Forexample, amplifier 163 amplifies the received waveforms io signal levels that are in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., to a voltage and/or a current required by tactile output generator 167 for generating tactile outputs so that the signals sent to tactile output generator 167 produce tactile outputs that correspond io the. waveforms received from haptic feedback controller 161) and sends the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167. ln response, tactile output generator

167 generates tactile outputs (e.g., by shifting a moveable mass back and forth in one or more dimensions relative to a neutral position ofthe moveable mass).

[00178] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes sensor 169, which is coupled to tactile output generator 167. Sensor 169 detects states or state changes (e.g., mechanical position, physical displacement, and/or movement) of tactile output generator 167 or one or more components of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., one or more moving parts, such as a membrane, used to generate tactile outputs). In some embodiments, sensor

169 is a magnetic field sensor (e.g,, a Hall effect sensor) or other displacement and/or movement sensor. In some embodiments, sensor 169 provides information (e.g., a position, a displacement, and/or a movement of one or more parts in tactile output generator 167) to haptic feedback controller 161 and, in accordance with the information provided by sensor 169 about the state of tactile output generator 167, haptic feedback controller 161 adjusts the waveforms output from haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., waveforms sent to tactile output generator 167, optionally via amplifier 163).

100179] Figure 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure I A) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (Ul) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the

DK 2016 70738 A1 graphic. For example, a swipe gesture (hat sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a {00180] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204, As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a. soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display.

(001811 In some embodiments, device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber identity Module (SIM) card slot 210, head set jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124, Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and bolding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process, in some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and-'or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100, (00182( Figures 2B-2C show exploded views of a first input device suitable for use in the electronic devices shown in Figures 1 A, 2A, 3, and-'or 4Ä (e.g., as home button 204). Figure 2B shows aa example of an intensity-sensitive home button with capacitive sensors used to determine a. range of intensity values that correspond to force applied to the intensity-sensitive home button. Figure 2G shows an example of a home button with a mechanical switch element. With reference to Figure 2B, fhe input device stack 220 includes a cover element 222 and a trim 224, In the illustrated embodiment, the trim 224 completely surrounds the sides of the cover element 222 and the perimeter of the top surface of the cover element 222. Other embodiments are not limited to this configuration. For example, in one embodiment the sides and/or top surface of the cover element 222 can be

DK 2016 70738 A1 partially surrounded by the tr im embodiments.

24. Alternatively, the trim 224 can be omitted in other ('00183} Both the cover element 222 and the trim 224 can be formed with any suitable opaque, transparent, and/or translucent material. For example, the cover element 222 can be made of glass, plastic, or sapphire and the trim 224 may be made of a metal or plastic. In some embodiments, one or more additional layers (not shown) can be positioned below the cover element 222. For example, an opaque ink layer can be disposed below the cover element 222 when the cover element 222 is made of a transparent material. The opaque ink layer can conceal the other components in the input device stack 220 so that the other components are not visible through the transparent cover element 222.

(0018-41 A first circuit layer 226 can he disposed below the cover element 222. .Any suitable circuit layer may be used. For example, the first circuit layer 226 may be a circuit board or a flexible circuit. The first circuit layer 226 can include one or more circuits, signal lines, and/or integrated circuits. In one embodiment, the first circuit layer 226 includes a. biometric sensor 228. Any suitable type of biometric sensor can be used. For example, in one embodiment the biometric sensor is a capacitive fingerprint sensor that captures at least one fingerprint when a user’s finger (or fingers) approaches and/or contacts the cover element 222 |00185| The first circuit layer 226 may be attached to the bottom surface of the cover element 222 with an adhesive layer 230, Any suitable adhesive can be used for the adhesive layer. For example, a pressure sensitive adhesive layer may be used as the adhesive layer

230.

|00186] A compliant layer 232 is disposed below the first circuit layer 22o. in one embodiment, the compliant layer 232 includes an opening 234 formed in the compliant layer 232. The opening 234 exposes the top surface of the first circuit layer 226 and/or the biometric sensor 228 when the device stack 220 is assembled. In the illustrated embodiment, the compliant layer 232 is positioned around an Interior perimeter of the trim 224 and/or around a peripheral edge of the cover element 222. Although depicted in a circular shape, the compliant layer 232 can have any given shape and/or dimensions, such as a square or oval. The compliant layer 232 is shown as a continuous compliant layer in Figures 2B and 2(3, but other embodiments are not limited to this configuration. In some

DK 2016 70738 A1 embodiments, multiple discrete compliant layers may be used in the device stack 220. Additionally, in some embodiments, the compliant layer 232 does not include the opening

234 and the compliant layer 232 extends across at least a portion ofthe input device stack

220. For example, the compliant layer 232 may extend across the bottom surface of tire cover element 222, the bottom surface ofthe first circuit layer 226, or a portion of the bottom surface of the cover element 222 ( e.g., around the peripheral edge of the cover element) and the bottom surface of the first circuit layer 226.

(00187] A. second circuit layer 238 is positioned below the first circuit layer 226. A flexible circuit and a circuit board are examples of a circuit layer that can be used in the second circuit layer 238. In some embodiments, the second circuit layer 238 can include a first circuit section 240 and a second circuit section 242. The first and second circuit sections 240, 242 can be electrically connected one another other, (00188] The first circuit section 240 can include a first set of one or more intensity sensor components that are included in an intensity sensor. In some embodiments, the first circuit section 240 can be electrically connected to the first circuit layer 226. For example, when the first circuit layer 226 includes a biometric sensor 228, the biometric sensor 228 may be electrically connected fo the first circuit section 240 of the second circuit layer 238.

fOOl89| fhe second circuit section 242 can include additional circuitry, such as signal lines, circuit components, integrated circuits, and the like. In one embodiment, the second circuit section 242 may include a board-to-board connector 244 to electrically connect the second circuit layer 238 to other circuitry in the electronic device. For example, the second circuit layer 238 can be operably connected to a processing device using the board-to-board connector 244, Additionally or alternatively, the second circuit layer 238 may be operably connected to circuitry that transmits signals (e.g., sense signals) received from the intensity sensor components) in the first circuit section 240 to a processing device.,Additionally or alternatively, the second circuit layer 238 may be operably connected to circuitry that provides signals (e.g., drive signals, a reference signal) to the one or more intensity sensor components in the first circuit section 240.

[ÖÖ19Ö| in some embodiments, the first circuit section 240 ofthe second circuit layer

238 may be attached to the bottom surface of the first circuit layer 226 using an adhesive

DK 2016 70738 A1 layer 236. hi a non-limiting example, a die attach Flint may be used to attach ihe first circuit section 240 to the bottom .surface ofthe first circuit layer 226.

[00191] A third circuit layer 246 is disposed below the first circuit section 240 of the second circuit layer 238. The third circuit layer 246 may include a second set of one or more intensity sensor components that are included in an intensity sensor. The third circuit layer 246 Is supported by and/or attached to a support element 248. In one embodiment, the support element 248 is attached to the trim 224 to produce an enclosure for the other components in the device stack 220. The support element 248 may be attached to the trim 224 using any suitable attachment mechanism.

[00192] The first set of one or more intensity sensor components in the first circuit section 240 and. the second set of one or more intensity sensor components in the third circuit layer 246 together form an intensity sensor. The intensity sensor can use any suitable intensity sensing technology. Example sensing technologies include, hut are not limited to, capacitive, piezoelectric, piezoresistive, ultrasonic, and magnetic, [00193] In the examples shown in Figures 2B and 2C, the intensity sensor is a capacitive force sensor. With a capacitive force sensor, the first set of one or more intensity sensor components can include a first set of one or more electrodes 250 and the second set of one or more force sensor components a second set of one or more el ectrodes 252. Although shown in a square shape In Figures 2B and 2C each electrode in the first and second sets of one or more electrodes 250, 252 can have any given shape (e.g,, rectangles, circles). Additionally, the one or more electrodes in the first and second sets 250, 252 may be arranged in any given pattern (e.g,, one or more rows and one or more columns).

[00.194] Figure 2B and 2C show two e lectrodes in the first and second sets of one or more electrodes 250, 252. However, other embodiments are not limited to this configuration. The first and second sets of one or more electrodes 250, 252 may each be a single electrode or multiple discrete electrodes. For example, if the first set of one or more electrodes is a single electrode, the second set of one or more electrodes comprises mul tiple discrete electrodes. In some embodiments, the second set of one or more electrodes can be a single electrode and the first set includes multiple discrete electrodes. Alternatively, both the first and second sets of one or more electrodes may each include multiple discrete electrodes.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00195] Each electrode in the first, set of one or more electrodes 251) is aligned in. at least one direction (e.g., vertically) with a respective electrode in the second set of one or more electrodes 252 to produce one or more capacitors. When a force input is applied to the cover element 222 (e.g., the input surface of the input device), at least one electrode in the fust set 250 moves closer to a respective electrode in the second set 252, which varies the capacitance of the capacitor!s), A capacitance signal sensed from each capacitor represents a capacitance .measurement of that capacitor. A. processing device (not shown) is configured to receive the capacitance signai(s) and correlate the capacitance signai(s) to an amount of intensity applied to the cover element 222. in some embodiments the force sensor can replace a switch element and different intensity thresholds can be used to determine activation events.

[00196] In some embodiments, such as the embodiment shown in Figure 2C. a switch element 254 can be positioned below the support element 248. The switch element 254 registers a user input when a force input applied to the cover element 222 exceeds a given amount of force (e.g., a force threshold associated with closing the distance between the first circuit section 240 and the third circuit layer 246). Any suitable switch element can be used. For example, the switch element 254 may be a dome switch that collapses when the force input applied to the cover element 222 exceeds the force threshold. When collapsed, the dome switch completes a circuit that is detected by a processing device and recognized as a user input (e.g., a selection of an icon, function, or application). In one embodiment, the dome switch is arranged such tha t the apex of the collapsible dome is proximate to the bottom surface of the support plate 248. In another embodiment, the base of the collapsible dome can be proximate to the bottom surface of the support plate 248.

[00197] Figure 3 is a block diagram o f an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPU’s) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry' (sometimes called a chipset) that

DK 2016 70738 A1 interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input/output (ί/öl interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touchscreen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generatorsi 167 described above with reference to Figure 1A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensorls) 165 described above with reference to Figure 1 A). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices;

and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located fromCPU(s) 310, In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure FA), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure 1 A) optionally does not store these modules.

f 00.198) Each of the above identified elements in Figure 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sots of instructions) need not bo implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are. optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified, above. Furthermore, memory' 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

(001519] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (”131) that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device 100.

DK 2016 70738 A1 (0Ö200I Figure 4A ilk islrates an example aser interface fora menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with sonre embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300, in some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

» Signal strength indicators) 402 for wireless commuuication(s). such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

Time 404:

• a Bluetooth indicator;

• Battery status indicator 406:

• fray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as;

o Icon 4 S6 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

c- Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally incl udes an indicator 410 of t he number of unread e-mai ls;

o icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple inc,) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and • icons for other applications, such as:

o Icon 424 for ΪΜ module 14.1, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;”

DK 2016 70738 A1 o icon. 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” c< icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

j00201] It should be noted that tlie icon labels illustrated in Figure 4A are merely examples. For example, in some embodiments, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

(00202] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, Figure 3) that is separate from the display 450. Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 35?) for detecting intensities of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

(00203] Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display .112 (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, die device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touchsensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in Figure 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis {e.g., 453 in Figure 48) on the display {e.g., 450i, In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e g., 460 and 462 in Figure 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g.. In Figure 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way. user inputs (eg., contacts 460 and 462. and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.. 451 in Figure 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interlace on the display (e.g,, 450 in Figure 4B) of the multifunction

DK 2016 70738 A1 device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should he understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

(00204] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g,, instead of movement. of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

)00205] As used herein, the terra “focus selector⁵' is an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting, in some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,' so that when an input (e.g., a press Input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface ie g„ touchpad 355 in Figure 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in Figure 4B) while the cursor is o\ er a particular user interface element (e.g,, a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in Figure 1A or the touch screen in Figure 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display a t a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user Interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, foc us is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a. touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button

DK 2016 70738 A1 to another button), in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions ot .he user interface: Without regard to the specific form taken hy the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface w ith which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a locus selector (e.g. , a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that tlie user is intending to activate the respective burton (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

]002O6j As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface is the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on die touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256), intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touchsensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touchsensitive surface. in some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact, area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to tlie contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to fhe con tact and/or changes thereto are, optionally., used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, hi some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or presstue are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensify threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to n

DK 2016 70738 A1 determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g... the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity ofa contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display.) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanicai control such as a knob or a button).

(00207] in some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g,, to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds arc determined in accordance with software parameters te.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100), For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresho lds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter), (00208] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact is a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensit ies of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g,, 0,05,0.1,0,2, 0.5,1,2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characterist ic intensity of a contact is, optional ly based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a

DK 2016 70738 A1 value at. the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value produced by lowpass filtering the intensity of the contact over a predefined period or starting at a predefined time, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold, in this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

)00209) In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location nray be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g,, only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location), in some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm., a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

(00210] The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show' the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive

DK 2016 70738 A1 surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds te. g.. a contact detection intensify threshold IT₍₎. a light press intensity threshold Π).. a deep press intensity threshold IT_V. (e.g., that is at least initially higher than ft,), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold that is lower than h,)). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interlace, hut is provided to aid iu the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button ofa physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button ofa physical mouse or a trackpad, in some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic Intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold ITo below which the contact is no longer defected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with mo vement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity' threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interlace figures.

[00211] In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs defected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “Sight press” inputs, the intensity ofa contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first Intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only If a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration {e.g , 40, i00, or .120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first, intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press”

DK 2016 70738 A1 threshold is increased This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based, criteria.

{00212] In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g,, ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Example factors are described in U.S, Patent Application Serial Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.

[00213] For example, Figure 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time pi from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component 478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input, fn some embodiments, when touch input 476 satisfies dynamic Intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in Figure 4C), the “deep press” response is triggered.

[00214] Figure 4D illustrates another dynamic intensiiy threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold io). Figure 4D also Illustrates two other Intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold I_H and a second intensity threshold Ij... In Figure 4D, although touch Input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold 1» and the second intensity threshold ?j prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 has elapsed al time 482. .Also m Figure 4D, dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefined delay time pi has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensify threshold Ij, was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold h, immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower

DK 2016 70738 A1 intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold h? or the second intensity threshold it.

)00215] Figure 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g.. intensity threshold In), in Figure 4E, a response associated with the intensity threshold ft. is triggered after the delay time p2 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time pi has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. So a decrease in intensify o f touch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold fo> followed by an increase in the intensify of touch input 490, without releasing touch input 490, can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold fo (e.g.. at time 494) even when the intensity of touch input 490 Is below another Intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold ft.

)0021.6] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold ITi, to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold FTt and the deep press intensity threshold IT© is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold ITo to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold Flfr is sometimes referred io as a “deep press” input. .An increase of characteristic intensity ofthe contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold 1T₍₁to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold Π_υ and the light press intensity threshold ITi. is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on th surface, A decrease of characteristic intensity ofthe contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold ΠΤ to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold Ffo is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touchsurface. In some embodiments ITo is zero. In some embodiments, IT» is greater than zero, in some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contac t.

)0021.7] In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in

DK 2016 70738 A1 response to detecting ihe respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g,, the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase In intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact, below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respec t i ve press input).

{00218] in some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input Intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected, only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the pressinput intensity threshold and. optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g. , the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances), {00210] For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input Intensity threshold or in response to a gesture

7S

DK 2016 70738 A1 including ihe press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting', an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity' threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding io, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met).

USER INTERFACES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES (00220] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UP) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300, with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a button of the device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button), and (optionally ) one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touchsensitive surface.

(00221] Figures 5 A1-5C19 illustrate exemplary ^user interfaces for providing tactile outputs and visual feedback in response to multiple types of inputs on a button of the de vice (e.g., a physical home button or a virtual home button) in accordance with some embodiments. Tire user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, Including the processes In Figures 7A-7G, 9A-9D, 11Ä-11E, 13A-13D, 15A-15E, 17Ä-17 D, and 19A-.19C. For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system 11.2. In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective ?9

DK 2016 70738 A1 contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system i i 2. However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

[00222] Figures 5AI-5AI8 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing haptic and visual feedback for button interaction in accordance with some embodiments. Figures

5A1-5A18 illustrate opening an application trom a home screen and providing visual feedback and tactile outputs in response to multiple types of inputs on the home button (e.g,, button 204).

[00223] device 100 (e

Figure 5A1 illustrates a user interface 510 for a menu of applications on g., a primary page of a multi-page home screen) in accordance with some embodiments. User interface 510 includes similar elements as user interface 400, as described above with respect to Figure 4A, and for the sake of brevity, an exhaustive description ofthe elements of user interface 510 is not provided here.

[00224] Figures 5A2-5 A3 illustrate an example of detecting an input ( e.g., a tap gesture by contact 502, Figure 5A2) on the Clock icon and displaying a riser interface 512 of the Clock application (in Figure 5A3).

[00225] Figures 5A4-5A8 illustrate an example of detecting changes in intensity of the contact te.g., contact 504) on the home button (e.g,, button 204) and providing visual feedback regarding activation ofthe home button (e.g., displaying a beginning of'a transition from user interface 512 back to user interface 510) in accordance with the intensity. In Figure 5 A4, the intensity of contact 504-a has not yet reached the “hint” intensity threshold ITu, so no visual feedback is displayed. In Figures 5A5-5A7, when the intensity of contact 504 increases above the hint intensify threshold 1¾. the visual feedback dynamically changes in accordance with the intensity ofthe contact. For example, as the intensity of contact increases from Figure 5A.5 to 5.A6, the transition from user interface 512 to user interface 510 is advanced (e.g., from user interface 513-1 to user interface 513-2), and as the intensity of contact decreases from Figure 5 A6 to 5 A7, the transition from user interface 512 to user interface 510 is reversed (e.g., from user interface 513-2 to user interface 513-1F Since the intensity of contact 504 does not increase above the Ifeht mess

DK 2016 70738 A1 intensity threshold I'D.. when the end of the input by contact 504 is detected, user interface 512 of the Clock application is redisplayed on the display (in Figure 5A8).

Figures 5A9-5A14 illustrate an example of detecting changes in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact 508) on the home button (e.g., button 204) and providing visual feedback regarding activation of the home button (e.g., displaying a beginning of a transition If om user interface 512 back to user interlace 510) in accordance with the intensity and providing tactile outputs in response to inputs on the home button (e.g., button 204). In Figures 5 A9-5Al 1, the transition fiom user interface 512 to user interface 51.0 is advanced (e.g,, from user interface 513-1 to user interface 513-2 to user interface 513-3) as the intensity of contact increases (e.g., from contact 508-a to contact 508-b to contact 508c), In Figure 5A11, when the intensity of contact 508-c increases to the “light press” intensity threshold ITl on the home button (e.g., a down-click of button 204, or sometimes referred to as a “press event”), device 500 provides a tactile output 503 (e.g., MimTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0,5). in Figure 5A13, when the intensity of contact 508-e decreases to the “light press release” intensity threshold H'lr (e.g., an up-click of button 204, or sometimes referred to as a “release event”), device 1.00 provides a different tactile output, such as tactile output 505 (e.g , MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.3). Since the intensity of contact 508 increases to tiie light press intensity threshold ITl (e.g., in Figure 5A11) and tiie end of the input by contact 508 is detected (e.g., by the release event in Figure 5 A13), the transition from user interface 512 to user interface 510 continues to completion, as shown in Figures 5A.11-5A14 (e.g., from user interface 513-3 in Figure 5A.11 to user interface 51.3-4 in Figure 5A12 to user interface 513-5 in Figure 5A13 to user interface 510 in Figure 5A14). The tactile outputs shown in Figures 5A11 and 5A13 correspond to a first range of values of the intensity-change metric (e.g., a “soft” intensity), as described'below with respect to method 1500, (00227( Figures 5AI5-5AI6 illustrate an alternative sequence from Figure 5A12 if the press input by contact 508 does not lift off until more than a threshold amount of time (e.g., a long press time Ttp) has elapsed. In this case, the animated transition from user interface 512 to user interface 510 is interrupted (e.g., at user interface 513-6 in Figure 5AI6) and user interface 515 (e.g., an automated assistant user interface) is displayed. In some embodiments, when the animated transition from user interface 512 to user interface 510 is interrupted, another animated transition Is displayed (e.g., from the point of

DK 2016 70738 A1 interruption to uset interface 5 i 5). as shown by user interface 514-1 it? Figure 5A17. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5AI6, when the intensity of contact 508-f is held above the light press intensity threshold IT_E, for the threshold amount of time (e.g., Tip), device 100 provides a tactile output 507 (e.g,, a double MiniTap 270 Hz or MicroTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.9). In some embodiments, as shown in. Figure 5A13, when the transition to the automated assistant user interface (e.g., user interface 515, Figure 5AI8) is complete, device 100 provides a tactile output 509 (e.g., a double MiniTap 270 Hz or MicroTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.9). In some embodiments, device 100 either provides a tactile output when a contact is held above the light press Intensity threshold ITt. for the Tip threshold amount of time (e.g,, tactile output 507, Figure 5A16) or provides a tactile output when the transition to the automated assistance user Interface is complete (e.g., tactile output 509, Figure 5A18), but not both.

{00228] In fhe examples of Figures 5 AI -5A18, the tactile outputs for press events (e.g,, when the intensity of contact increases to the light press Intensity threshold 1T_E.) and release events (e.g., when the intensity of contact decreases to the light press release intensity threshold IT· x) on the home button (e.g., button 204) are shown as Mini l aps at .270 Hz (e.g., when a second tactile output setting is selected, as described below with respect to Figures 5C1-5C9). In some embodiments, when a first tactile output setting is selected (e.g., as described below with respect to Figures 503-509), the tactile outputs in these examples would be Mini Taps at 230 Hz, In some embodiments, when a third tactile output setting is selected (e.g,, as described below with respect to Figures 500-502), the tactile outputs in these examples would be MiniTaps at 300 Hz. Similarly, in Figures 5B15B75, the tactile outputs tor press events and release events are shown as MiniTaps at 270 Hz (e.g., when the second tactile output setting is selected), but if fhe first tactile output setting or the third tactile output setting is selected, the tactile outputs would be MiniTaps at 230 Hz or 300 Hz, respectively.

(00229] Figures 5.B 1-5B75 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing haptic and visual feedback .for button interaction in accordance with some embodiments. Figures

5B1-5B75 illustrate opening an application from a folder of a secondary' page of a multipage home screen and providing visual feedback and tactile outputs in response to multiple types of inputs on the home button (e.g., button 204),

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00230) Figure 5.81 illustrates a user interface 520 for a menu of applications on device 100 (e.g., a secondary page of a multi-page home screen) in accordance with some embodiments. User interface 520 includes similar elements as user interface 400. as described above with respect to Figure 4A, and for the sake of brevity, an exhaustive description oft.be elements of user interlace 520 is not provided here.

[00231 [ Figures 5 B2- 5 B3 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g., a tap gesture by contact 530, Figure 5B2) on the Photography folder and displaying a user interface 522 of the Photography folder (In Figure 5B3), (00232} Figures 5B4-5B5 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g,, a tap gesture by contact 531, Figure 5B4) on the Pages icon (e.g., for a word processor application, such as the Pages application by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.) of user interface 522 and displaying a user interface 524 of the Pages application (e.g., in Figure [00233] Figures 5B6-5B14 illustrate an example of detecting a double click (e.g.. with a. first press event, followed by a first, release event, followed by a second press event, where the first and second press events are detected within a threshold amount of time of each other, such as a double click time threshold Toe) close in time, where both the first and second press events occur before a threshold amount of time, such as an interrupt time threshold T). Since both the first and second press events occur before the interrupt time threshold Tj, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g,, the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder) is interrupted (e.g., at a first point when the second press event is detected, as shown in Figure 5B.10), [00234] Figures 5B6-5B10 i llustrate a beginning of an animated transition from user interlace 524 (e.g., the Pages appiication) to user interface 522 (e.g,, the Photography folder). In Figure 5B6, when the intensity of contact 532-a increases to the light press intensity threshold ITi. on the home button (e.g,, a first down-click of button 204, or sometimes referred to as a “first, press event”), device 100 provides a tactile output 571 (e.g,, MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of I). In Figure 5B8, when the intensity of contact 532-c decreases to the light, press release intensity threshold ΠΥκ (e.g., a first up-click of button 204 or sometimes referred to as a “first release event”), device 100 provides a different tadle output, such as tactile output 572 te g.. MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5). in Figure

DK 2016 70738 A1

5BI.0. when the intensity of contact 532-e increases to the light press intensity threshold IT: on the home button for a second time within the double click time threshold T_vs< (e.g., a second down-click of button 204, or sometimes referred to as a “second press event”), device 100 provides another tactile output, such as tactile output 573 (e.g,, MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8). The tactile outputs shown in Figures 5B6, 5138, and 5BI0 correspond to a second range of values ofthe intensity-change metric (e.g., a “normal' intensity), as described below with respect to method 1500, [ÖÖ235] in Figure 5B10, when the second press event is detected, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g,, the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g,, Photography folder) is interrupted at a first point (e.g., at user interface 525-5) and an animated transition to user interface 528 (e.g., a multi-tasking user interface) begins from the point of interruption. Figures 5B11-5B13 illustrate the animated transition from the point of interruption to user interface 528 (e.g., from user interface 526-1 in Figure 5B11 to user interface 526-2 in Figure 5B12 to user interface 526-3 in Figure SB 13). Figure 5B14 illustrates user interface 528 (e.g., a multi-tasking user interface) with the Pages application (e.g., user interface 524) on top.

(00236!) Figures 5B i 5-5B16 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g., a press input by contact 533, Figure 5BI5) on the home button (e.g,, button 204) and displaying user interface 524 of the Pages application (in Figure 5B16). Figure 5B16 is the same starting point as Figure 5B5. The tactile output shown in Figure 5B15 corresponds to a first range of values of the intensity-change metric (e.g., a “soft” intensity), as described below with respect to method 1500.

(00237.1 Figures 5B17-5B25 illustrate an alternative sequence io Figures 5B6-5B14, starting from user interface 524 of the Pages application in Figure 5B5. Figures 5BI7-5B25 illustrate an example of detecting a double click (e.g.. with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, where the first and second press events are detected within a threshold amount of time of each other, such as double click time threshold Toe) further apart in time (as compared to Figures 5B5-5B14), where both the first and second press events occur before a threshold amount of time, such as interrupt time threshold Tj. Since both, the first and second press events occur before the interrupt time threshold 1), the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface 522 (e.g.. the Photography folder) is interrupted (e g.. at a second point when the second press event is detected, as shown in Figure 5Β2 5Ϊ

Figures 5B17-5821 illustrate a beginning of an animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder ). In Figure 5B17, when the intensity of contact 534-a. increases to the light, press intensity threshold ΪΊ'ι. on the home button (e.g., a first down-click of button 204, or a first press event), device 100 provides a tactile output 575 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of

1). In .Figure 5Ö.19, when the intensity of contact 534-c decreases to the light press release intensify threshold IT;,_R (e.g,, a first np-click of button 204, or a first release event), device 100 provides a different tactile output, such as tactile output 576 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5). in Figure 5B21, when the intensity of contact 534-e on the home button for a second time within the doable click time threshold Tm. (e.g., a second down-click of button 204, or a second press event), device 100 provides another tactile output, such as tactile output 577 (e.g,, MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8). The tactile outputs shown in Figures SB 17, 5B19, and 5B21 correspond to a second range of values ofthe intensity-change metric (e.g., a “normal” intensity), as described below with respect to method 1500.

[00239] In Figure SB21, when the secoud press event is detected, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g,, the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder) is interrupted at a second point (e.g., at user interface 525-6), later than the first point (e.g., at user interlace 525-5 in Figure 5BIÖ), and an animated transition to user interface 528 (e.g., a multi-tasking user interlace) begins from the second point of interruption. Figures 5B22-5B24 illustrate the animated transition from the second point of interruption to user interface 528 (e.g., from user interface 527-1 In Figure 5B22 to user Interlace 527-2 in Figure 5B23 to user interface 527-3 in Figure 5B24). Figure 5B25 illustrates user interface 528 (e.g., a multi-tasking user interface) with the Pages application (e.g., user interface 524) on top.

[00240] Figures 5B26-5B27 illustrate an example of detecting an input, (e.g., a press input by contact 535, Figure 5B26) on the home button (e.g., button 204) and displaying user interface 524 of the Pages application (in Figure 5B27). Figure 5B27 is the same starting point as Figure 5B5. The tactile output shown in Figure 5B26 corresponds to a first

DK 2016 70738 A1 range of values of the intensity-change meine (e.g., a “soft ” intensify). as described below with respect to method 1500.

Figures 5B28-5B38 illustrate an alternative sequence to I'lgutes 5BO-5BI4 and Figures 5B17-5B25, starting from user interface 524 of the Pages application in Figure 5B5. Figures 5B28-5B38 illustrate an example of detecting a double click (e.g., with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, where the first and second press events are detected within a threshold amount of time of each other, such as double click time threshold'foe) even further apart. In time (as compared to .Figures 5B5-5B14 and Figures 5B16-5B25), where the first press event occurs before a threshold amount of time, such as interrupt time threshold Ti, and the second press event occurs after the interrupt time threshold I), Since the second press event occurs after the interrupt time threshold Tj, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.e., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder) is not interrupted before the animated transition to the multi-tasking user interface (e.g., user interface 529, Figure 5B38), (00242| Figures 5B28-5B34 .illustrate an animated transition fiom user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder). In Figure 5B28, when the intensity of contact 536-a increases to the light press intensity threshold ITl on ihe home button te.g., a first, down-click of button 204, or a first press event), device 100 provides a tactile output 579 (e.g,, MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1). in Figure 5B3Ö, when the intensity of contact 536-e decreases to the light press release intensity threshold ITj.r (e.g. , a first up-click of button 204, or a first release event), devi ce 100 provides a different tactile output, such as tactile output 580 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5). in Figure 5B32, when the intensity of contact 536-e increases to the light press intensity threshold ITi. on the home button for a second time within the double click time threshold Tæ (e.g.. a (002431 & Figure 5B32, when the second press event is detected, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the second down-click of button 204, or a second press event), device 100 provides another tactile output, such as tactile output 58.1 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8). The tactile outputs shown in Figures 5B28, 5B3Ö, and 5B32 correspond to a second range of values of the intensity-change metric (e.g., a “normal” intensity), as described below with respect to method 1500.

DK 2016 70738 A1

Photography folder) is not interrupted since the second press event occurs after the interrupt time threshold T_t, Figures 5B33-5B34 Illustrate a continuation of the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., tlie Photography folder) and Figure 5B3$ illustrates user interface 522, Figures 5B36-5B37 illustrate an animated transition horn user interface 522 (e.g.. the Photography folder) to user interface 529. Figure 5B38 illustrates user interface 529 (e.g,, a multi-tasking user interface) with the Photography folder (e.g., user interface 522) on top.

(00244] Figures 5B40-5B48 illustrate an alternative sequence to Figures 5B6-5Ö14, Figures 5B17-5B25, and Figures 5B28-5B38, starting from user interface 524 of the Pages application in Figure 5B5. Figures 5B40-5B48 illustrate an example of detecting two single clicks, where the second press event occurs after the double click time threshold Toe- Since the second press event occurs after the double click time threshold Toe, the two press events are treated as two single clicks (as opposed to a double click).

(00245] Figures 5B40-5B46 illustrate an animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g,, the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder). In Figure 5B4Ö, when the intensity of contact 537-a increases to the light press intensity threshold Π), on the home button (e.g,, a down-click of button 204, or a first press event), device 100 provides a tactile output 582 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1). In Figure 5B42, when the intensity ofcontact 537-e decreases to the light press release intensity threshold ITj.r (e.g., an up-click of button 204. or a first release event), device 1ÖÖ provides a different tactile output, such as tactile output 583 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5). In Figure 5B45, when the intensity of contact 53S~a increases to the light press intensity threshold ΠΥ on the home button after the double click, time threshold T»c has elapsed (e.g., a down-click, of button 204, or a second press event), device 100 provides a tactile output 584 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1). In some embodiments, tactile output 584 (in Figure 5B45) has tlie same characteristics (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1) as tactile output 582 (in Figure 5B50) because they are both down-clicks of a single click, input. The tactile outputs shown in Figures SB40, 5B42, and 5.B45 correspond to a second range of values of' the intensity-change metric (e.g., a “normal” Intensity), as described below with respect to method 15ÖÖ,

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00246] In. Figure 5B45, when the second press event is detected, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g,, the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g,. the Photography folder) is not interrupted, since the second press event is a separate single elicit. Figure 5B46 illustrates a continuation of the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interlace 522 (e.g., the Photography tolderi and Figure 5B47 illustrates user interface 522. Although not shown, in some embodiments, device 100 displays an animated transition from user Interface 522 (in Figure 5B47) to user interface 520 (in Figure 5B48).

|00247| Figure 5B49 illustrates a comparison of the alternative sequences from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application), as explained above in detail. The top row of Figure 5B49 illustrates the sequence of Figures 5B5-5B14, where there is a. double click close in time and both the first and second press events occur before Tj. The second row of Figure 5.B49 illustrates the sequence of Figures 5B16-5B25, where there is a double click with the first press event and the second press event further apart in time, but both the first and second press events occur before Tj. The thir d row of Figure 5B49 illustrates the sequence of figures 5827-5B38, where there is a. double click witb the first press event and the second press event even further apart in time, and the first press event occurs before Tj and the second press event occurs after Tj. The fourth row·' of Figure 5S49 illustrates the sequence of Figures 5B39-5B48, where there are two single clicks, with the first press event occurring before Ί) and the second press event occurring after inc.

[00248] Figures 5B50-5B59 illustrate yet another alternative sequence to Figures 5B5-5B15, In Figures 5B50-5B59, the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g.. the Photography tolder) does not begin until after the first release event (e.g., in Figure 5B53). Although not shown, in some embodiments, fhe sequences of Figures 5B16-5825, Figures 5B27-5B38, and/or Figures 5B39-5B48 have alternative sequences where the animated transition from user interface 524 (e.g., the Pages application) to user interface 522 (e.g., tire Photography folder) does not begin until after the first release event (e.g., in Figure 5B 1.9., Figure 5B30, and Figure 5B42, respectively).

[00249] Figures 5B60-5B61 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g., a press input by contact 540, Figure 5B60) on the home button (e.g., button 204) and displaying

SS

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface 524 of the Pages application (in Figure 5B61). The tactile output shown, in Figure 5B60 corresponds to a first range of values of tire intensity-change metric te.g,, a “soft” intensity), as described below with respect to method 1500.

('00250] Figures 5B62-5B65 illustrate a “soft” intensity down-click and a “soft” intensify up-elick. hi Figure 5B63, when the intensity of contact 541-h increases to the press intensity threshold FlY on the home button with a “soft” intensity (e.g., for an intensity-change metric value range up to a. predefined number of units of intensify per second, such as 1250 grams per second), device .100 provides a tactile output 590 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0,5). In Figure 5B65, when the intensity of contact 541-d decreases to the light press release intensity threshold ITj.r with a “soft” intensity (e.g., for an intensity-change metric value range up to a predefined number of units of intensity per second, such as 1250 grams per second), device 100 provides a tactile output 591 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.25). in some embodiments, the tactile outputs of “soft” upclick events are 50% of the tactile outputs of “soft” down-click events. In some embodiments , fhe audio outputs of “soft” up-click events are 50% of the audio outputs of “soft” down-click events.

(00251] Figures 5B66-5B69 illustrate a “normal” intensity down-click, and a “normal” intensity up-click. In Figure 5B66, when the intensity of contact 542-b increases to the light press intensity threshold ΓΗ. on the home button with a “normal” intensity (e.g,, for an intensity-change metric value range greater than a predefined number of units of intensity per second, such as 1250 grams per second), device 100 provides a tactile output 592 (e.g.. MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1). In Figure 5B69, when the intensify of contact 542-d decreases to the fight press release intensity threshold ITlr with a “'normal” intensity (e.g,, for an intensity-change metric value range greater than a predefined number of units of intensity per second, such as 1250 grams per second), device 100 provides a tactile output 593 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz witli a gain of 0,5). In some embodiments, the tactile outputs of “normal” up-etick events are 50% of the tactile outputs of “normal” down-click events. In some embodiments, the audio outputs of “normal” up-click event s are 50% of the audio outputs of “normal” down-click events, (00252] Figures SB70-5B75 illustrate using the home button (e.g., button 204) as a ck” button. Figures 5B71-5B72 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g., a press

DK 2016 70738 A1 input by contact 543, Figure 5B7 i S on the borne button, {e.g., button 204) while displaying user interface 522 (e.g., the Photography folder), and in response, displaying user interface 520 (e.g., a secondary page of a multi-page home screen with the Photography folder). Figures 5B73-5B74 illustrate an example of detecting an input (e.g. , press input by contact 544. Figure 5B73> on the home button (e g.. button 2()4ϊ while displaying user interface 520 (e.g., ihe secondary page of a multi-page home screen), and in response, displaying user interface 510 (e.g., a primary page of a multi-page home screen), in some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5B75, when an input (e.g., a press input by contact 545) is detected on the home button while displaying the primary page of a multi-page home screen (e.g. , user interface 5IO), device 100 provides a tactile output 596 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), but. does not change the displayed user interface.

1002531 Figures 5C1-5C19 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for a home button configuration process in accordance with some embodiments. Figures 5C1-5C19 illustrate an example of a home button configuration process during which a user selects and tr ies out a plurality of tactile output settings for a home button before selecting a tactile output settinu for the home button on the device.

[00254] Figures 5C.1-5C5 illustrate an example of selecting “Settings’' then “General” then “Home Button.” Figures 5C6-5C7 illustrate an example of an animated transition to user interface .564 (e.g., a home button configuration user interface with option 2 selected). In Figure 5C8, option 2 is currently selected as the tactile output setting. In some embodiments, option 2 is selected as the default tactile output, setting. In some embodiments, option 2 corresponds to a second tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 270 Hz. In Figure 5C9, when the intensity of contact 553 increases to the light press intensity threshold FTt on the home button, device 100 provides a tactile output 561 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz) that corresponds to the selected tactile output setting (e.g., option 2).

[00255] Figures 5C10-5C11 illustrate an example of selecting option 3 (e. g., with a press input hy contact 554 on option 3, Figure 500) and displaying user interface 566 (e.g,, a home button configuration user interface with option 3 selected). Although not shown, in some embodiments, an· animated transition is displayed between user interface 564 (in Figure 500} and user interface 566 (in Figure 501) where option 2 moves back in place and where option 3 moves toward fhe home button (e.g., button 204).

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00256) lu Figure 5C11, option. 3 is currently selected as the tactile output setting. In some embodiments, option 3 corresponds to a third tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 300 Hz. in Figure 502, when the intensity of contact 555 increases to the light press intensity threshold Π), on the home button, device 100 provides a tactile output 565 (e.g., MiniTap 300 Hz> that corresponds to the selected tactile output setting (e.g.. option 3 >.

[00257) Figures SC 13-504 illustrate an example of selecting option 1 (e.g.. with a press input by contact 556 on option 1, Figure 503) and displaying user interface 568 (e.g., a home button configuration user interface with option .1 selected). Although not shown, in some embodiments, an animated transition is displayed between user interface 566 (in Figure 5C13) and user interface 568 (in Figure 5C14) where option 3 moves back in place and where option 1 moves toward the home button (e.g., button 204).

[00258) in Figure 504. option 1 is currently selected as the tactile output setting. In some embodiments, option 1 corresponds to a first tactile output pattem such as MiniTap 230 Hz. In Figure 505, when the intensity of contact 557 increases to the light press intensity threshold ΠΤ on the home button (e.g., button 204), device 100 provides a tactile output 567 (e.g., MiniTap 230 Hz) that corresponds to the selected tactile output setting (e.g., option 1), [00259) Figures 5C16-5C17 illustrate an example of selecting “Done” (e.g., with a press input by contact 558 on the “Done” icon. Figure 506) with option 1 selected and in response, displaying user interface 562 (e.g., the General Settings user interface, Figure 507).

[00260) In Figure 508, when the intensity of contact 559 increases to the light press intensity threshold ΓΙΥ. on the home button (e.g., button 204), device 100 provides a tactile output 569 (e.g., MiniTap 230 Hz) that corresponds to the selected tactile output setting (e.g., option I ). In response to the input on the home button (e.g., button 204), user interface 510 (e.g., the primary page of a multi-page home screen) is displayed (in Figure 509), Note that Figures 5A1-5A18 and 5BI-5B75 were illustrated with the tactile output setting on option 2, so the tactile outputs in these figures corresponded to the selected tactile output setting of option 2 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz). If a user had selected option 1 for the tactile output setting (e.g., as shown in Figure 5C16). the tactile outputs in Figures 5A1-5A1S and 5B1-5B75 would correspond to the selected tactile output setting of option 1 (e.g.. MiniTap

DK 2016 70738 A1

230 Hz). Similarly, if ihe user had selected option 3 for the tactile output setting, the tactile outputs in Figures 5A1-5A18 and 5BI-5B75 would correspond to the selected tactile output setting of option 3 (e.g., MfniTap 300 Hz).

[00261] Figures 6A1-6B26 illustrate example user interfaces for controlling generation of user interface haptic feedback and generation of home button haptic feedback in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 13Ä-13D. Although some of the examples which follow will he given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface 451 that is separate from the display 450, as shown in Figure 4B, [00262j in some embodiments, the device provides a tactile output control setting (e.g.. Sounds and Haptics Setting) that allows the user to turn on and turn off user interface tactile output generation at the device.

{00263 j In general, the device generates user interface tactile output of various types in response to direct interactions with a user interface element, e.g., selection, manipulation, drag/drop, and/or activation of the user interface element through a focus selector (e.g,, a pointer or a contact) that is placed in proximity to the user interface element when a user input is detected. The user Interface tactile outputs are generally accompanied by visual changes in the user interface. For example, in some embodiments, the device provides a tactile output (e.g., MicroTap (150Hz)) in response to an input that picks up an item in a user interface (e.g., a long press input by a sustained contact at a location that corresponds to the item), and the user interface shows that the object is lifted up toward tire surface of the display and the tactile output is timed to coincide with the end of the movement of the object. In addition io user interface tactile outputs, the device also generates tactile outputs in response to activation of a persistent button (e.g., a virtual home button or a nonmechanical home or back button) on the device. The activation of the button may or may not be accompanied with corresponding visual changes in the user interface. For example, in response to a press input on a home button, the device generates a tactile output and dismisses a currently displayed user interface and displays the home screen, in response to another press input on the home button, the device generates a tactile output for the button

DK 2016 70738 A1 press, bur continues to dispiay the home screen, (e.g.., when the currently displayed home screen is the only home screen or the primary page of a multi-page home screen ). Therefore, in some contexts, the device allows the user to turn off user interface tactile outputs, e.g., to conserve power or reduce distraction. However, the device also prevents the user from inadvertently turning off the tactile output generation for the persistent button when the user merely wishes to turn off ihe user interlace tactile outputs.

14] In some embodiments, the device provides non-visual feedback that Includes th an audio output component and a tacti le output component. Certain types of audio outputs are paired with visual changes in the user interface or exist independent of any visual changes In the user interface. For example, audio alerts, ringtones, music clips, can be played independent of tactile outputs, and serve to alert the user of some changes in the user interface or in the state of the device. In some embodiments, the device generates certain audio outputs that are specifically tied to and enhance or supplement a tactile output. Iltese types of audio outputs are referred to as “haptic audio outputs” herein. In some embodiments, a non-visual feedback profile includes a tactile output pattern for a tactile output and a haptic audio output pattern for a haptic audio output that accompanies the tactile output to invoke certain haptic sensations in a user. The interplay between the frequencies, amplitudes, waveforms, and/or timings of tire haptic audio output and the corresponding tactile output creates a richer and more nuanced haptic sensation in the user, and makes the non-visual feedback more salient to the user, in some contexts, the device allows the user to control the generation of haptic audio output (e.g., the haptic audio outputs that correspond to user interface tactile outputs, and/or the haptic audio outputs that correspond to the deviee/system tactile outputs (e.g., home button tactile outputs)) using the general volume control and/or mute control, e.g., to conserve power and/or to reduce distraction. However, tire device also prevents the user from Inadvertently turning off the haptic audio for deviee/system tactile outputs (e.g,, the audio that accompanies the tactile outputs for activation of the persistent button).

[00265] Figures 6A1-6A26 illustrate generation of tactile outputs when the user interface tactile outputs are tinned on at the device. Figures 6A1-6A26 illustrate that, when the user interface tactile outputs are turned on at the device, the device generates both user interface tactile outputs and system tactile outputs (e.g., tactile outputs for activation of hardware or persistent buttons on the device). Figures 6B1-6B26 illustrate that, when the

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface tactile outputs are turned off at the device, the device generates system tactile outputs (e.g., tactile outputs for activation of hardware or persistent buttons on die device), but forgoes generation of at least some of tbe user interface tactile outputs.

|ÖÖ266] As shown in Figure 6A1, a control user interface (e.g., sounds and haptics control user interface 680) includes a number of toggle settings for controlling sounds and haptic outputs at the device. For example, vibrate on ring setting 670 is set to “OFF” via toggle control 671; vibrate on silent setting 672 is set to ‘OFF’ via toggle control 673; and user interface tactile output setting 674 is set to “ON” via toggle control 675, Sounds and haptics control interface 680 further includes volume control 676 for setting a current volume for ringer and alert audio outputs (e.g.. by moving volume indicator 677 along volume control 676), In addition, change with buttons setting 678 is set to “OFF” via toggle control 679, |00267] While user interface haptic outputs are tinned on via toggle control 675 at device 100, user interface tactile outputs as well as system tactile outputs are generated. In Figure 6A2-6A4, an input by a contact (e.g., contact 604) is detected on touch screen 112 at a location that corresponds to an application launch icon (e.g,, icon 606 for launching the Mail application) on a home screen user interface (e.g., home screen 602), As shown in Figures 6.A3-6A4, when a characteristic intensity of contact 604 increases above a light press Intensity threshold ITj. (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6A4), home screen 602 (except for icon 606) is blurred and a menu (e.g.. quick action menu 608) is presented over the blurred home screen 602 (as shown in Figure 6Ä4). In addition, as shown in Figure 6 A4, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 604 above the light press intensity threshold ITj.., device 100 generates tactile output 612 (e.g,, MicroTap (200Hz), Gaia: 1.0) in conjunction with presenting quick action menu 60S.

[00268j Figures 6A5-6A8 illustrate that, while contact 604 is maintained on touch screen 112, the device detects movement of contact 604 from a location that corresponds to application launch icon 606 to respective locations that correspond menu options 614,616, 618, and 620. As contact 604 moves to the location that corresponds to each of menu options 614, 616, 618, and 620, device 100 generates a respective tactile output (e.g... fächle outputs 622, 624. 628. and 630) (e.g., MicroTap (270Hz), Gain;0.4. minimum interval; 0.05s) to indicate that contact 604 has move to a different menu option.

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00269] Figures 6A8-6A0 illustrate thai. lift-off of contact 604 is detected when contact 604 is over menu option 620. in response to detecting lift-off of contact 604, device iOO launches the M ail application and displays a user interface of the Mail application (e.g., email listing user interface 622) that corresponds to menu option 620, as shown in Figure 6A10.

[00270] in Figures 6A11-6A13, an input hv another contact (e.g.. contact 624} is detected on touch screen 112 at a. location that corresponds to an email item [e.g.. item 626) in a listing of email items. As shown in Figures 6A11 .-6A13, when a characteristic intensify of contact 624 increases above the light press intensity threshold ii) (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6A13), email listing user interface 622 (except for item 626) is blurred and a preview of item 626 (e.g., preview 628) is presented over the blurred email listing user interface 622 (as shown in Figure 6A13}. in addition, as shown in Figure 6A13, in response to detecting ihe increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 624 above the light press intensity threshold ITj., device 100 generates tactile output 630 (e.g., MicroTap (200Hz), Gain; 1.0) in conjunction with presenting preview 628.

[00271 ] Figures 6A13-6A16 illustrate that, while contact 624 is maintained on touch screen 112, the device detects leftward movement of contact 624 from Its touch-down location. T he leftward movement of contact 624 drags preview 628 toward the left side of touch screen 112. While preview 628 Is dragged toward the left side of touch screen 112, hidden menu option 632 (e.g., “Archive”) is gradually revealed from behind preview 628. in Figure 6A16, as contact 624 moves across a threshold position (e.g., a hidden threshold position to the left of the center line of touch screen 112) in the user interlace for triggering an operation associated with hidden menu option 632 (e.g., archiving the email item and removing it from the email listing), device 100 changes the color of menu option 632 to indicate that the threshold for triggering the archive operation is met by the movement of preview 628. In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 634 (e.g., MicroTap (270Hz), Gain; 1,0} in conjunction with the visual changes in the user interface to indicate that the threshold for triggering the archive operation is met by the movement of preview 628.

[00272 ] Figures 6A17-6A19 illustrate that, lift-off of contact 624 is detected after contact 624 has crossed (or has dragged preview 628 past) the threshold position for triggering the archive operation. In response to detecting lift-off of contact 624, device 100 «s

DK 2016 70738 A1 performs the archive operation on the email that correspond to item 626. and item 626 is removed from the listing of email items, as shown in Figure 6A19.

In Figures 6A20-6A22, an input by another contact (e.g., contact 636) is detected on touch screen 112 at a location that corresponds to another email item (e.g., item 638) in the listing of email items. As shown in Figures 6A20-6A22, when a characteristic intensity of contact 636 increases above the light press intensity threshold FFt (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6A22), email listing user interface 622 (except for item 638) is blurred and a preview of item 638 (e.g., preview 640) is presented over the blurred email listing user interface 622 (as shown in Figure 6A22). In addition, as shown in Figure 6A22, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 636 above the light press intensity threshold Π)., device 100 generates tactile output 642 (e.g., MicroTap (200Hz), Gain; 1.0) in conjunction with presenting preview 640, {00274] Figure 6.A23 illustrates that, while contact 636 is maintained on touch screen 112 (e.g., over preview 640), the device detects au increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 636 above a deep press intensity ihreshold ITo. in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 636 above the deep press intensity threshold, device 100 ceases to display preview 640 and displays content display user interface 644 (e.g., a user interface that, displays the content of email item 638) in placed of the blurred email listing user interface. In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 646 (e.g., FuliTap (150 Hz), Gam; 1.0) in conjunction with ihe display of user interface 644.

(00275] In Fi gure 6A24, li ft-off of contact 636 i s detected, and user interface 644 is maintained after lift-off of contact 636 is detected.

{00276] Figure 6A25 illustrates that, while user interface 644 is displayed on touch screen 112, a press input by a contact (e.g., contact 646) is detected on a home button (e.g., home button 650) on device .100. In response to detecting the press input (e.g., an increase in tire characteristic intensity of contact 646 above the light press intensity threshold ITt), device 100 generates tactile output 648 (e.g., Mini rap (230Hz), Gain; 1.0) to Indicate that home button 650 is activated by the press input. Figure 6A26 illustrates that, in response to activation of home button 650 by the press input, user interface 644 is dismissed, and home screen 602 is displayed in placed of user interface 644 on touch screen 112,

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00277) Figures 6ΒΪ-6Β26 illustrate generation of tactile outputs when ihe user interlace tactile outputs are turned off at the device. In particular, Figures 6B1-6B26 illustrate that, when the user interface tactile outputs are turned off at the device, the device continues to generate system tactile outputs (e.g., tactile outputs for activation of hardware or persistent buttons on the device), but forgoes generation of user interlace tactile outputs, except when generation of a particular user interface tactile output is exempt from control by the user tactile output setting.

('00278] As shown in Figure 6B1, user interface tactile output setting 674 is set to “OFF” via toggle control 675 in sounds and haptics controi interface 680

While user Interface haptic outputs are turned off via toggle control 675 at device 100, at least some user interface tactile outputs are no longer generated. In Figure 6B2-6B4, an input by a contact (e.g., contact 605) is detected on touch screen 112 at a location that corresponds to icon 606 for launching the Mail application on home screen 602. As shown in Figures 6B3-6B4, when a characteristic· intensity of contact 605 increases above the light press intensity threshold ITl (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6B4), home screen 602 (except for icon 606) is blurred and quick action menu 608 is presented over the blurred home screen 602 (as shown in Figure 6B4). In addition, as shown in Figure 6B4, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 605 above the light press intensity threshold ΠΥ, device 100 generates tactile output 613 (e.g., Micro Tap (200Hz). Gain; 1.0) in conjunction with presenting quick action menu 60S. In this example, even though tactile output 613 is a user interface tactile output, tactile output, for presenting a quick action menu in response to a press input is exempted from the control of the user interface tactile output setting. In other words, a tactile output (e.g., MicroTap (200Hz). Gaia:1.0) that accompanies the presentation of a quick action menu in response to a press input on an application launch icon is always generated regardless current tactile output setting for user interface tactile outputs, in accordance with some embodiments.

jOOiSOj Figures 6B5-6B8 Illustrate that, while contact 605 is maintained on touch screen 112, the device delects movement of contact 605 from a focation that corresponds to application launch icon 606 to respective locations that correspond menu options 614, 616.

.18, and 620. As contact 605 mo ves to the locati on that corresponds to eac h of menu

DK 2016 70738 A1 options 614, 616, 6 18., and 620, device 1.00 highlights thai menu option to indicate that contact 605 has moved to a different menu option, but does not generates any tactile output to accompany the visual changes that are occurring in the user interface (e.g., in contrast to the scenarios shown in Figures 6A5-6A8 where tactile outputs 622, 624,628, and 630 were generated to indicate that contact 604 has move to a different menu option), in other words, in some embodiments, device 100 forgoes generation of tactile outputs for some portions of an input (e.g., the movement across individual menu options by contact 605) when user interface tactile outputs are turned off, while continues to generate tactile outputs for other portions of the input (e.g., the increase in intensity of contact 605 above the light press intensity threshold to cause display of quick action menu 608) regardless of whether the user interface tactile outputs are turned on or turned off )00281] Figures 6B8-6B9 illustrate that, lift-off of contact 605 is detected when contact 605 is over menu option 620, In response to detecting lift-off of contact 60S, device 100 launches the Mail application and displays email listing user interface 622 that corresponds to menu option 620, as shown in Figure 6B10.

)00282} in Figures 6B11-6B13, an input, by another contact ίe.g., contact 625) is detected on touch screen .112 at a location that corresponds to item 626 in a listing of email items. As shown in Figures 6BI1-6Ö13, when a characteristic intensity of contact 625 increases above the light press intensity threshold ITj. (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6B13). email listing user interface 622 {except for item 626) is blurred and preview 628 is presented over the blurred email listing user interface 622 (as shown in Figure 6ΒΪ3), In addition, as shown in Figure 6BI3, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 625 above the light press intensity threshold ITt, device 100 generates tactile output 63.1 (e.g., MicroTap (200Hz), Gain; 1.0) in conjunction with presenting preview 628. in other words, a tactile output (e.g., MicroTap (2O0Hz), Gain; 1.0) that accompanies the presentation of a preview in response to a press input on an item is always generated regardless of the current tactile output setting for user interface tactile outputs, in accordance with some embodiments.

)00283} Figures 6B13-61316 illustrate that, while contact 625 is maintained on touch screen 112, the device detects leftward movement of contact 625 from its touch-down location. The leftward movement of contact 625 drags preview 628 toward the left side of

DK 2016 70738 A1 touch screen 112. While preview 628 is dragged toward the left side of touch screen 112, hidden menu option 632 te.g., “Archive”) is gradually revealed from behind preview 628. In f igure 61316, as contact 625 moves across a threshold position (e.g,, a hidden threshold position to the left ofthe center line of touch screen 112) in the user interface for triggering an operation associated with hidden menu option 632 (e.g., archiving the email item and removing it front the email listing), device 100 changes the color of menu option 632 to indicate that the threshold tor triggering the archive operation is met by the movement of preview 628. However, in contrast to the scenario shown in Figure 6A16, device 100 does not generate any tactile output in conjunction with the visual changes in the user interface.

In other words, device 100 has forgone generation of the user interface tactile output in accordance with the current tactile output setting which is in the “OFF” state.

100284) Figures 6B17-6B19 illustrate that, lift-off of contact 625 is detected after contact 625 has crossed (or has dragged preview 628 past) the threshold position for triggering the archive operation, in response io detecting lift-off of contact 625, device 100 performs the archive operation on the email that correspond to Item 626, and item 626 is removed from the listing of email items, as shown in Figure 6B19, |00285] In Figures 6B20-6B22, an input, by another contact (e.g., contact 637) is detected on touch screen 112 ai a location that corresponds io item 638 in the listing of email items. As shown in Figures 6B2Ö-6B22, when a characteristic intensity of contact 637 increases above the light press intensity threshold ITt (as indicated by intensity meter 610 in Figure 6B22), email listing user interface 622 (except for item 638) is blurred and preview 640 is presented over the blurred email listing user interface 622 (as shown in Figure 6B22). In addition, as shown in Figure 6B22, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 637 above the light press intensity threshold ITt, device 100 generates tactile output 643 (e.g., MieroTap (200Hz), Gain:! .0) in conjunction with presenting preview 640, because tactile output 643 is exempted from control by the current tactile output setting for turning off user interface tactile outputs.

100286] Figure 6B23 illustrates that, while contact 637 is maintained on touch screen

112 (e.g., over preview 640), the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 637 above the deep press intensity threshold if:·». In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 637 above the deep press intensity

QÖ

DK 2016 70738 A1 threshold, device 100 ceases ίο display preview 640 and displays content display user interface 644 in placed of the binned email listing user interface, in addition, device 100 generates tactile output 647 (e.g., FullTap (150Hz), Gain: 1,0) in conjunction with the display of user interface 644, because tactile output 647 is exempted from control by the current tactile output setting, for turning off'user interface tactile outputs.

{00287] in Figure 6B24. lift-off of contact 637 is detected, and user interface 644 is maintained after lift-off o f contact 637 is detected.

|09288] Figure 6B25 illustrates that, white user interface 644 is displayed on touch screen 112, a press input by a contact (e.g., contact 647) is detected on home button 650 on device 100. In response to detecting the press input (e.g., an increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 647 above the light press intensity threshold ΠΥ), device 100 generates tactile output 649 (e.g., MiniTap (230Hz), Gain: 1.0) to indicate that home button 650 is activated by the press input. Figure 6B26 illustrates that, in response to activation of home button 650 by the press input, user interface 644 is dismissed, and home screen 602 is displayed in placed of user interface 644 on touch screen 112.

{0(1289] Although not shown in Figures 6A1-6B26, haptic audio outputs may accompany some or all of the tactile outputs that are generated in the above example, depending on the particular prioritization of different considerations in various usage contexts and device power saving configurations. For example, in some embodiments, haptic audio outputs are controlled by the general device audio volume control and/or mute control.

100290] In some embodiments, haptic audio outputs are always generated when tactile outputs are generated, irrespective of whether the device is muted.

{00291] in some embodiments, haptic audio outputs are always generated when system tactile outputs are generated, Irrespective of whether the device is muted.

{00292] In some embodiments, haptic audio outputs are always generated when user interface tactile outputs are generated, irrespective of whether the device is muted.

{00293] In some embodiments, when tactile outputs are generated, haptic audio outputs are muted when the device is muted, and haptic audio outputs ate generated when the device Is not muted.

too

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00294) In. some embodiments, when system tactile outputs are generated, haptic audio outputs that accompany system tactile outputs are muted when the device is muted, and haptic audio outputs that accompany system tactile outputs are generated when the device is not muted.

[00295) In some embodiments, when user interface tactile outputs are generated, haptic audio outputs that accompany the user interface tactile outputs are muted when the device is muted, and haptic audio outputs that accompany the user interface tactile outputs are generated when the device is not. muted.

|00296| In some embodiments, when the device generates haptic audio with tactile outputs, the device generates haptic audio outputs in accordance with characteristics of the tactile outputs that are also generated. For example, the amplitude of the audio output is increased when the amplitude of the corresponding tactile output is increased. For example, the frequency of the audio output is increased when the frequency o f the corresponding tactile output is increased. In some embodiments, the amount of change for a property (e.g. , ampl itude or frequency) in the audio output is greater than the amount of change for the property in the corresponding tactile output.

[00297] In some embodiments, when the device generates haptic audio with tactile outputs (e.g., user interface tactile outputs that are controlled by user interface tactile output setting), the device generates haptic audio outputs with amplitudes that are adjusted based on a volume setting of the device. In some embodiments, when the device generates haptic audio with tactile outputs (e.g., user interface tactile outputs that are exempt from being controlled by user interface tactile output setting), the device generates haptic audio outputs with amplitudes that are not adjusted based on a volume setting of the device.

)00298] In some embodiments, ihe device continues to generate haptic audio outputs when user interface tactile outputs arc turned off. irrespective of the mute/unmute setting of the device. For example, for tactile outputs that are not exempted from control by the user interface tactile output setting, when the tactile outputs are not generated, the device may generate audio outputs in place of the tactile outputs to provide non-visual feedback to the user.

105

DK 2016 70738 A1 ]ÖÖ299] In. some embodiments, the device only buns off haptic audio outputs (e.g., haptic audio outputs for user interface tactile outputs) in accordance with a mute setting of the device, if user interface tacti le outputs are turned on.

100300] Other variations of the haptic output control and tactile output control are possible, and are not exhaustively listed herein.

Figures 7A-7G are flow diagrams illustrating a method 700 of providing visual feedback regarding activation of a user input device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button) in accordance with some embodiments. The method 700 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1 A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more sensors to detect intensifies of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface and/or a respective button ofthe device (e.g,, a virtual or physical home button), and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touchsensitive surface is on or integrated with the display, in some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the method 7ÖÖ is governed by instructions that are stored in a computer-readable storage medium (e.g,, a nontransitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors ofthe electronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure 1 A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 700 as performed by the device 100. Some operations in method 7ÖÖ are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

(00302] Method 700 relates to displaying a beginning of visual feedback regarding activation of a user input device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button) in response to detecting a precursor input (e.g., a Sight touch) that is consistent with an input (e.g., a press input) that activates the user input device. In some embodiments, a user interface change that corresponds to the activation ofthe user input device is presented as a continuation of the visual feedback that is already presented, when the input that activates the user input device is detected. If the input for activating the user input device is not defected before the termination of fhe precursor input, the visual feedback ceases to be displayed and fhe original state ofthe user interface is restored. Displaying the beginning of the visual feedback regarding activation of the user input device before the actual activation of the

102

DK 2016 70738 A1 user input device provides information to the aser regarding the effect of ihe input (e.g., activation of the home button to go back to a home screen), and allows the user an opportunity to make a decision regarding whether to proceed with completing the input based on ihe information. Thus, the visual feedback enhances the operability of the device by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating, interacting with ihe device, and additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

(00303] in some embodiments, the home button of the device is a physical home button or a virtual home button (e.g., button 204, Figure 5A1), In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display, in some embodiments, the device Includes one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, in some embodiments, the home button is available on the device (e.g., persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display) in a plurality o f different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a. first type (e.g.. a press input or a press and release input that is detected via the depression of a mechanical switch or by compari ng an intensity of a contact on the home button to activation criteria that are based on one or more intensity thresholds as described in greater detail with reference to methods 900,1300,1500, and 1700) on the home button (e.g. , and, optionally , to redisplay a previously displayed user interface such as a previous view of an application or a system user interface such as a home screen of the device, a multitasking user interface, or a virtual assistant user interface). Other aspects of configuring the haptics for home button activation are described in greater detail with reference to methods 1100 and 1900.

100304] In some embodiments, the home button responds to multiple types of inputs, including; an input of the first type (e.g., a single click (e.g., with one press event, or one press event followed by one release event)), an input of a second type (e.g., a double click (e.g., with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, or with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, followed by a second release event, wherein the first and second press events are detected within a threshold amount of time of each other)), an input of a third type (e.g., a long press (e.g., with a first press event that does not lift-off until more than a threshold

103

DK 2016 70738 A1 amount of time has elapsed)), and an input of a fourth type (e.g., a deep press te.g., with a first press event that includes an increase in intensity of a contact above a deep press intensity threshold within a threshold amount of time after initial touch-down of the contact)). In some embodiments, each type of input is associated with dismissing a currently displayed user interface, and performing a eotresponding operation, and, optionally, displaying a corresponding user interface associated with the operation, [00305] In accordance with method 700 and with reference to Figure 7A, the device (e.g., device 100, Figure 5A1) displays (702), on the display, a first user interface (e.g., a home screen or a pr imary page of a multi-page home screen, such as user interface 510 in Figure 5A f). White displaying the first user interface (e.g.. user interface 51.0, Figure 5A1), the device detects (704) an input directed to the first user interface (e.g.. a tap gesture by contact 502 on the Clock icon. Figure 5.A2). For example, the input directed to the first user interface is a touch input on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to an activatable object in the first user interface or the entire user interlace (and not on the home button). As another example, the input directed to the first user interface is a touch input directed to an application launch icon, a folder icon, a notification, a menu option, a control aftbrda.ri.ee (e.g., to display a control user interface), or ihe user interface as a whole (e.g., a swipe input on the home screen or the primary page of a mult i-page home screen).

[00306] In response to detecting the input directed to the first user interlace (706), the device ceases to display the first user interface (e.g., user interface 510, Figure 5A2), and displays a second user interface (e.g., user interface 512 of the Clock application. Figure 5A3) (e.g., a user interfece of a first application, an expanded folder overlaid on a darkened home screen, an expanded notification overlaid on a darkened home screen, a control panel overlaid on a darkened home screen, a multitasking user interface that concurrently presents respecti ve representations of multiple user interfaces, a secondary page of a multi-page home screen, a notification screen, a widget screen, etc.), distinct from tlte first user interfece.

[00307] While displaying the second user interfece, the device detects (708) a contact on the home button (e.g., contact 504-a, as shown in f igure 5A4). While continuously detecting the contact on the home button, the device performs at least three operations (710). First, the device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a

104

DK 2016 70738 A1 first intensity threshold te.g., a hint intensity threshold Π'η) (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A5l. Second, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, the device displays a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5A5-5 A6 and Figures 5A9-5A.10). Third, while displaying the beginning of the transition front the second user interface back to the first user interface, the device detects an input sequence that includes detecting a press input (e.g., input sequence 504-a through 504-d by contact 504, Figures 5A4-5 A7, or input sequence 508-a through 508-e by contact 508, Figures 5A95A13) that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above tlie first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold ITn) (e.g., the intensity of the contact continues to increase after reaching the first intensity threshold, and after the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interfece is displayed).

IÖÖ308] Turning now to Figure 7B, in response to detecting the input sequence (712), the device determines whether the input sequence meets first criteria and/or determines whether the input sequence meets second criteria. In accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, the first criteria requiring that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A11) (e.g., the second intensity threshold is the light press intensity threshold. ITt, and the second intensify threshold is higher than the first intensity threshold) before an end of the press input is detected (e.g., detecting an end of the press input includes detecting a release input such as a liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface or a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below a release intensity threshold (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A13) (e.g., the release intensity threshold may be preconfigured to be above, below, or the same as the light press intensity threshold, or is dynamically determined based on an input metric of the press input (e.g., rate of increase in the intensity of the contact))), the device: ceases to display the second user interface, and redisplays the first user interface on the display (e.g., at the end of (he transition from the second user interlace back to the first user interface, the first user interfece is redisplayed and (he second user interface is no longer displayed). For example, in Figures 5A8-5AI4, the input sequence meets the first criteria and device 100 ceases to display user interfece 512 (in Figure 5AS) and redisplays user inteifaee 510 (in Figure 5 A14) at the end of the transition (e.g., user interfaces 513-1 through 513-5, Figures 5A9-5A13) from user interface 510 back to user interface 510.

ins

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00309( In accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, the second criteria requiring that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains be low the second intensity threshold before the end of die press input is detected, the device; reverses the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, and redisplays the second user interface on the display For example, in Figures 5A4-5AS, the input sequence meets the second criteria and device 100 reverses the beginning of the transition (e.g., fiom user interface 513-2 to user interface 513-1, Figures 5A6-5A7) and redisplays the second user interface on the display (e.g,, user interface 512, Figure 5A8).

(00310( In some embodiments, ceasing to display the second user interface and redisplaying the first user interface includes (714) displaying a continuation of the beginning of the transition fiom the second user interface back to the first user interface (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A9-5A13). In some embodiments, by displaying a continuation of the visual feedback that is displayed in response to die precursor input, the complete transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface is performed seamlessly according to the expectation of the user, without distracting the user with unexpected visual changes and makes the user interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating'interacting witli the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves ba ttery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. In addition, the transition fi om the second user interface to the first user interlace is not unnecessarily delayed due to presentation of the visual feedback in response to the precursor input.

(00311 j in some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes (716) concurrently displaying at least a portion of the second user interface with at least a port ion of the first user interface. For example, in Figure 5A9, user interface 513-1 includes a portion of user interface 512 and a portion of user interface 510, In some embodiments, as the transition advances, more of user Interface 510 is displayed and less of user interface 512 Is displayed (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A1Ö-5A13),

106

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00312] In. some embodiments, the first nser interface is a home screen (e.g., user interface 510. Figure 5Ä1 j that includes a plurality of application launch icons that correspond to different applications on the electronic device (718).

{00313] Turning now to Figure 7C, in some embodiments, the first user interface and the second user interface are consecutively displayed user interfaces of an application (720). For example, the home button serves as a back button in some contexts.

[00314] in some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interlace back to the first user interface includes (722) reducing a size of the second user interface (e.g., in accordance with increasing intensity of the contact). For example, as shown in Figures 5A5~5A6, as the characteristic intensity of contact 504 increases, a displayed size of second, user interface 512 is reduced, in some embodiments, the device reveals (724) the first user interface from behind the second user interface, as second user interface is reduced in size (e.g., with increasing intensity of the contact). For example, the second user Interface is displayed in full screen size before the contact reaches the first intensity threshold (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A4), and with increasing intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, the second user interface shrinks to reveal fhe screen In the background (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A5-5A6).

[00315] In some embodiments, the second user interface is a user interface of a first application (e.g., user interface 512 of the Clock application, Figure 5 AS), the first application corresponds to a first application launch icon in the first user interface (e.g., the Clock icon on user interlace 510, Figure 5A14), and reducing the size of the second user interface incl udes shrinking the second user interface toward a position of the first application launch icon on the first user interface (726) (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A95AF3).

[00316] In some embodiments, the second user interface includes an expanded folder (e.g., overlaid on a blurred and expanded version of the first user Interface) (e.g., user interlace 522, Figure 5B7Ö), the expanded folder corresponds to a first folder icon in the first user interface (e.g., the Photography folder icon in user interface 520, Figure 5B72), and reducing the size of die second user interface includes shrinking the expanded folder toward a position of the first folder icon on the first user interface (and, optionally,

107

DK 2016 70738 A1 shrinking and clarifying the expanded version of the first user interface at the same time) (728).

[00317] In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of ihe transition horn the second user interface back to the first user interface includes (730) shifting the second user interface laterally in a first direction (e.g., in accordance with increasing intensity of the contact). For example, the secondary page of the home screen (e.g., user interface 520, Figure 5S72) shifts leftward or rightward to make room for the primary page of the home screen (e.g,, user interface 510, Figure 5B74). In some embodiments, the device reveals (732) the first user interface, as the second user interface is shifted laterally in the first direction (e.g., the home screen is revealed from behind the second user interface, or the home screen slides in next to the moving second user interfaces.

[00318] Turning now to Figure 7D, in some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes (73 fading (or decreasing the opacity of) the second user interface (e.g,, In accordance with increasing intensity of the contact). For example, a widget screen next to the home screen fades away, as the primary page of the home screen slides in from the side. In some embodiments, the device shifts (736) the first user Interface laterally in a first direction to cover the second user interface (e.g., sliding the home screen in), as the second user interface fades out.

[00319] In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition fiom the second user interface back to the first user interface includes (738) changing a virtual depth of at least one of the first user interface and the second user interface (e.g., in accordance with increasing intensity of the contact). For example, starting from a stacked state with the second user interface closer to the surface of the dispiay, the second user interface shifts left and then right while receding away from the surface of the display with increasing contact intensity, while the first user interface shifts right and then left while coming toward the surface of the [00320] In some embodiments, the second user interface (e.g., a multi-tasking user interlace 528, Figure 5B15) includes a representation of the first user interface (e.g,, a application user interface 524, Figure 5B16), and displaying the beginning of the transition ftoni the second user interface back to the first user interface includes expanding the

108

DK 2016 70738 A1 representation of the first user interface included in the second user interface and reducing a virtual depth of the representation of the first user Interface ¢742). In Figures 5BI5-5BI6, the representation of the Pages application pops out front the multi-tasking user interface 528 in response to the press input by contact 533 on the home button. As another example, if the second user interlace (e.g., a multi-tasking user interface) included a representation of the home screen in the top position, the representation of the home screen would pop out from the multi-tasking user interface.

Turning now to Figure 7E, in some embodiments, defecting the input sequence further includes (744) detecting that the characteristic intensity o f the contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second Intensity threshold (e.g., greater than the first intensity threshold) before fhe first criteria are met by fhe input sequence (e.g., before a home button action (e.g., dismissing a current user Interface and restoring the home screen) is activated by an input of the first type (e.g., a single click)), in some embodiments.

the device, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between the fust intensity threshold and fhe second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence, dynamically advances and reverses the transition from the second user inter face to fhe first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensify of fhe contact (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5A9-5A10). In some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with fhe characteristic intensity of the contact educates the user regarding how to complete the input (e.g., by pressing harder) versus how to cancel the input (e.g., by lifting off without pressing harder). In addition, the user is allowed more time to consider whether or not to complete the input, which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operaflng/interaeting with tire device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently [00322j In some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes (746) dynamically changing a blur radius applied to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

109

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00323] In some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes (748) dynamically revealing at least a portion of the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact, (e.g., progressively revealing more of the first user interface as the characteristic intensity of the contact increases and progressively hiding more of the first user interface as the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases) (e.g., as sho wn in Figures 5A5-5Ä7).

(00324] in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes (750): dynamically shifting a position of the second user interface on the display (e.g., laterally in a first direction (e.g., horizontally)) in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact, and a corresponding amount of the first user interface is revealed as the position of the second user interface is dynamically shifted (e.g., shifted back and forth laterally in the first direction) in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the second user interface is progressively shifted in a first direct ion to reveal a portion of the first user interface as the characteristic intensity of the contact increases and ihe second user interlace is progressively shifted in a second direction that is opposite to fhe first direction to hide tlie portion of fhe first user interface as the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5A5-5A7).

[00325] With reference to Figure 7F, in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes (752): dynamically changing an opacity of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the opacity used to render the second user interface is progressively decreased to reveal the first user interface as the characteristic intensity of tl contact increases and the opacity used to render the second user interface is progressively increased to obscure the first user interface as fhe characteristic intensity of the contact decreases.

[00326] in some embodiments, fhe second user interface is an expanded version of a portion of the first user interface (e.g., fhe expanded folder Ui looks like a portion of an expanded version of the home screen), in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and

110

DK 2016 70738 A1 reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes: dynamically changing a size of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact (754). For example, as intensity of the contact increases, the expanded folder UI shrinks, pulling part of the first user interface surrounding the folder into the viewable area of the display, and with decreasing intensity of the contact, the shrunken folder re-expands, pushing out the part of the first user interface surrounding ihe folder out of the viewable area of the display.

[00327] In some embodiments, the second user interface includes a representation of the first user interface, in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes (756} dynamically changing a virtual depth of the representation of the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g, , with increasing contact intensity, the representation of the first user interface expands in size and advances toward the surface of the display in the z-direction, and the representations of other user interfaces remains at the same depth as before and becomes covered by the expanding and advancing representation of die first user interface; with decreasing contact intensity, the process reverses).

[00328] In some embodiments, the first user interface is a home screen (e.g., user interface 510, Figure 5 A14) and the second user Interface is a user interface of a first application (e.g,, user interface 512, Figure 5AS) (758), In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input sequence and in accordance with the determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5A9-5AB), the device closes or suspends the first application (760).

[00329] in some embodiments, the first user interface is a primary page of a multipage home screen (e.g,, user interface 510, Figure 5B74), and the second user interface is a secondary page of a multi-page home screen (e.g., user interface 520, Figure 5B72) (762), [00330] In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g,, user interface 520, Figure 5B72) is a home screen (the home screen including a first folder icon that corresponds to a first folder that includes one or more folder items) and the second user interface (e.g., user interlace 522, Figure 5B7O) includes an expanded view of the first folder te g.. an expanded lit

DK 2016 70738 A1 folder including one or more application launch icons, overlaid on a de-emphasized version of the home screen) that includes larger (e.g., lull size) representations of the one or more folder items (764), (00331] With reference now to Figure 7G, in some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output, generators (766), as discussed above, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the input sequence and In accordance with the determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, the device generates a first, tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators (768). as shown in Figure 5.A1.1. in some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is a pre-click threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold ΪΤη) and no tactile output Is generated upon detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, as shown in Figures 5A9-5A10.

J 00332] in some embodiments, the device generates (770) a tactile output upon detecting the increase in the characteristic Intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the tactile output generated upon detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of fhe contact above the first Intensity threshold is different (e.g,, in amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform) than the tactile output generated In response to determining that the input sequence meets the first criteria, in some embodiments, the tactile output generated upon detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold is the same as the tactile output generated In response to determining that the input sequence meets the first criteria.

(00333] In some embodiments, the device forgoes generating (772) a tactile output In respon se to detecting the increase in the characteristic in tensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, as shown in Figures 5A9-5A10.

(00334] In some embodiments, in. accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic Intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of long press criteria (e.g., a minimum duration, such as Tu> in Figure 5Ä16, of a press input that starts with an increase in the characterist ic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold), the device interrupts (774) an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition (e.g., including user interlace 514-1, Figure 5A17) to a third user interface (e.g.,

DK 2016 70738 A1 an automated assistant user interface, such as user interface 515, Figure 5A.18) that is associated with the long press criteria, as shown in Figures 5AI5-5AI8.

('00335] For example, after the characteristic intensity of the contact has increased above tire second intensity threshold, the device will no longer reverse the transition back to the second user interface with decreasing contact intensity. Instead, the transition progresses toward redisplaying the fust user interface, if the contact is maintained for more than a threshold amount of time after the characteristic intensity of the contact has increased above the second intensity threshold, however, the device interrupts the transition toward the first user interface, and redirects to displaying a third user Interface (e.g,, die digital assistant user interface, such as user interface 51.5, Figure 5A18). Additional examples are provided below with reference to method 900.

[00336) Displaying visual feedback in accordance with an initial portion of an input, and allowing a bifurcation and/or interruption of a user interface transition that is already in progress based on how the input continues, makes the user interface more responsive and efficient. For example, the device does not have to wait until termination of the input to determine its type, and thus shortens or eliminates a delay in starting a suitable user interface transition that, corresponds to the determined Input type. Providing the improved visual feedback to the user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating, interacting with the device) which additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

)00337) In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of multiple-click, criteria (e.g., a minimum duration between repeated clicks which is optionally measuted fiom first up-click to second up-click, first down-click to second up-click, or first up-click to second down-click, or first downclick to second down-click of two sequential click inputs that correspond to an increase and subsequent decrease of the characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button), the device interrupts (776) an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a fourth user interface (e.g., a multitasking user in

DK 2016 70738 A1 interface) that is associated with the multiple-click· criteria (e.g., as described in greater detail below with reference to method 9001. As one non-limiting example, after the characteristic intensity of the contact has increased above the second intensity threshold (e.g., in Figure 5B6), the device will no longer reverse the transition back to the second user interface with decreasing contact intensity instead, the transition progresses toward redisplaying the first user interface (e.g.. as shown in Figures 5B7-5810), However, if a second press input by the contact is detected within a threshold amount of time (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B10), a double click input is registered; and the device interrupts the redisplaying of the first user interface and transitions (e.g,, as shown In Figures 5B11-5 BI 3) to displaying a fourth user interface (e.g., the multitasking user interface, such as user interface 528, Figure 5B14),

It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 7A-7G have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that tbe described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 900, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1700, and

1900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 700 described above with respect to Figures 7A-7G, For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 900, 1100, 1300,1500, 1700, and 1900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

|00339] In accordance with some embodiments. Figure 8 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 800 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 8 are, optionally, combined or separated Into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described

114

DK 2016 70738 A1 embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in Figure 8, the electronic device 800, includes a display unit 801 configured to display information (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display), Figure 1 A), a. touch-sensitive surface unit 804 (e.g., display controller 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure FA) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, one or more sensor units 806 configured to detect, intensities o f contacts with the touch-sensiti ve surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), optionally one or more tactile output generating units 807 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 808 coupled with the display unit 802, the touch-sensitive surface unit 804, the one or more sensor units 806, and the optional one or more tactile output generating units 807. For ease of illustration. Figure 8 shows display unit 802 and touch-sensitive surface unit 804 as integrated with electronic device 800, however, in some embodiments one or both of these units are in communication with the electronic device, although the units remain physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3), In some embodiments, the processing unit includes a displaying unit (e.g., displaying unit 810), an input detecting unit (e.g., Input detecting unit 812), a characteristic intensity detecting unit (e.g,, characteristic intensity detecting unit 814), a determining unit (e.g,, determining unit 816), and a tactile output generating unit (e.g., tactile output generating unit

Uj in some embodiments, the processing unit, (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 810-818) is configured to: display, on the display, a first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 810); while displaying the first user interface, detect an input directed to the first user interface (e.g., with the input detecting unit 812); in response to detecting die input directed to the first user interface; cease to display the first user interface (e.g,, with the displaying unit 810), and display a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 810); while displaying the second user interface, detect a. contact on the home button; while continuously detecting the contact on die home button; detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., with the input detecting unit 812); in response to detecting the increase in the characteri stic intensity of the contact to the first intensity

DK 2016 70738 A1 threshold, display a beginning ofa transition from tire second user interface back to the first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 810): while displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, detect an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that Includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold {e.g., with the input detecting unit 812); in response to detecting the input sequence: in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, the first criteria requiring that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected; cease to display the second user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 810), and redisplay the first user interface on the display te.g., with the displaying unit 810); and in accordance with a determination that, the Input sequence meets second criteria, the second criteria requiring that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before the end of the press input is detected ; reverse the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interlace (e.g., with the displaying unit 810), and redisplay the second user interface on the display (e.g,, with the displaying unit 8.10).

(00342] in some embodiments, ceasing to display the second user interlace and redisplaying the first user interface includes displaying a continuation of the beginning of the transition from the second user interlace back to the first user interface.

(00343j In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user Interface back to the first user interface includes concurrently displaying at. least a portion of the second user interface with at least a portion of the first user interface, }00344| In some embodiments, ihe first user interface is a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons that corresponds to different applications on the electronic device.

[00345) In some embodiments, the first user interface and the second user interface are consecutively displayed user interlaces of an application.

100346] In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back fo the first user interface includes reducing a size of the second user interface.

116

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00347( In some embodiments, the processing imii is configured to; reveal the -firsi user interface front behind the second user interface, as the second user interface is reduced in size (e.g., with the displaying unit 810), {00348] in some embodiments, the second user interface is a user interface of a first application, the first application corresponds to a first application launch icon in the first user interface, and reducing the size of the second user interface includes shrinking the second user interface toward a position of the first application launch icon on the first user interface.

{00349] In some embodiments, the second user interface includes an expanded folder, the expanded folder corresponds to a first folder icon in the first user interface, and reducing the size of the second user interface includes shrinking the expanded folder toward a position of the first folder icon on the first user interface.

{00350] in some embodiments, displaying the beginning of die transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes shifting the second user interface laterally in a first direction.

In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: reveal the first user interface, as the second user interface is shifted laterally in the first direction (e.g.. with the displaying unit 810), {00352] In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes fading the second user interface.

(00353] in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to; shift the first user interface laterally in a first direction to cover the second user interface, as the second tuer interface fades out (e.g.. with the displaying umf 8101.

(00355] In some embodiments, the second user interface includes a representation of the first user interface, and displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interlace back to the first user interface includes expanding the representation of the first {00354] In some embodiments, displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes changing a virtual depth of at least one of die first user interface and the second user interface.

117

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface included i« the second user interface and reducing a virtual depth of the representation ofthe first user interface.

)00356] In some embodiments, detecting the input sequence further includes detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence; and, the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity ofthe contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence (e.g,, with the characteristic intensity detecting unit 814), dynamically advance and reverse the transition horn the second user interface to the first user inter face in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., with the displaying unit 810), )00357} in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface In accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes: dynamically changing a blur radius applied to the first user interlace in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact.

)00358] in some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes; dynamically revealing at least a portion ofthe first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

)00359] In some embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interlace in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes: dynamically shifting a position of the second user interface on the display in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact, wherein a corresponding amount of the first user interface is revealed as the position of the second user interface is dynamically shifted in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

)00360] in sonie embodiments, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes; dynamically changing an opacity of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

118

DK 2016 70738 A1 {00361 ] In some embodiments, the second user interface is an expanded version of a portion of the first user interface; and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition front the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes: dynamically changing a size of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

(00362] in some embodiments, the second user interface includes a representation of the first user Interface, and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first, user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes: dynamically changing a virtual depth of the representation of the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensit y of the contact.

{00363] In some embodiments, the first user interface is a home screen, the second user interface is a user interface of a first application, and the processing unit Is configured to: in response to detecting the input sequence: In accordance wi th the determination that the Input sequence meets the first criteria, close or suspend the first application.

{00364] In some embodiments, the first user interface is a primary page of a multipage home screen, and the second user interface is a secondary page of a multi-page home screen.

{00365] in some embodiments, the first user interface is a home screen, wherein the home screen includes a first folder icon that corresponds to a first folder that includes one or more folder items: and the second user interface includes an expanded view of the first folder that includes larger representations of fhe one or more folder items.

{00366] in some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output generatom, and the processing unit, is configured to; in response to detecting the input sequence; in accordance with the determination that fhe input sequence meets the first criteria, generate a first tactile output (e.g., with the tactile output generating unit 818) {00367] In some embodiments, fhe processing unit is configured to: generate a tactile output upon detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., with the tactile output generating unit 818).

119

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00368] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: forgo generating a tactile output in response to detecting the contact above the first intensity threshold.

increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe j003691 in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to, in accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of long press criteria (e.g., with the characteristic intensity detecting unit 814), interrupt au animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a third user interface that is associated with the long press criteria (e.g,, with the displaying unit 810).

[0()370] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to, in accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of multipleclick criteria, interrupt an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interlace to display an animated transition to a fourth user interface that is associated with the multiple-click criteria, [00371] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g,, as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application-specific chips.

[00372] The operations described above with reference to Figures 7A-7G are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 8, For example, displaying operation 702, detection operation 704, responding operation 706, detection operation 708, detection operation 710, and responding operation 712 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer ISO, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A. respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation, ofthe

120

DK 2016 70738 A1 device fioni one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer i SO activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 1.90 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by ihe application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary' skill in the an how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[ÖÖ373] Figures 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 900 of providing visual feedback and tactile outputs in response to multiple types of inputs on a home button of a device in accordance with some embodiments. The method 900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g,, device 300, Figure 3, or portable muhifirnction device 100, Figure 1 A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface and/or a respective button of ihe device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button). In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. Io some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface, in some embodiments., ihe method 900 is governed by instructions thai are stored in. a computerreadable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure 1 A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 900 as performed by the device 100. Some operations in method 900 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00374J

Method 900 relates to starting an animation transition from a first user interface to a second user interface in response to an initial portion of an input, where the animated transition can be interrupted at different points to progress toward a third user interface depending on if and when the criteria for transitioning to the third user interface are met by a subsequent portion of the input. Starting the animated transition before the input type of the input Is completely ascertained improves the responsiveness of the user interface. Matching the timing ofthe interruption to the timing of when the input type is ascertained improves the visual feedback provided to the user (e.g., by making the device appear more responsive to user input), and enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by helping the user fo provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when

DK 2016 70738 A1 operating/uderaciing with ihe device). Furthermore, in many cases, ihe transition toward the second user interface is completed without interruption (e.g., the subsequent portion of the input turns out to be consistent with the request to transition to fee second user interface). In such cases, by having started the user interface transition toward the second user interface as soon as the initial portion of the input is detected, the outcome that is intended by the user is achieved without unnecessary delay. Thus, the improved visual feedback is compatible wife the user’s expectation, while making the user interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interaef ing wife the device) which additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of fee device by enabling the user to use fee device more quickly and efficiently.

(00375] In some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a button of the device (e.g., a physical or virtual button, such as a physical home button or a virtual home button, such as button 204, Figure 5Bi), In some embodiments, the home button is available on the device (e.g., persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display) in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type (e.g., a single click input with a press event, or with a press event and release event, that is detected via the depression of a mechanical switch or by comparing an intensity of a contact on the home button to activation criteria that are based on one or more intensity thresholds as described in greater detail with reference to methods 700, 1300, 1500, and 1700) on the home button (e.g., and, optionally, redisplay a previously displayed user interface such as a previous view of an application or a system user interface suc h as a home screen of the devi ce, a multitasking user interfece, or a virtual assistant user interface). Other aspects of configuring the haptics tor home button activation are described in greater detail with reference to methods 1100 and 1900, |00370j In some embodiments, the home button responds to multiple types of inputs, including; an input of the first type (e.g., a single dick (e.g.. with one press event, or one press event followed by one release event)), an input of a second type (e.g., a double click (e.g., with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, or with a first press event, followed by a first release event, followed by a second press event, followed by a second release event, wherein the first and second press events

122

DK 2016 70738 A1 are detected within a threshold amount of time of each other) J, an input of a third type te.g., a long press (e.g., with a first press event that does not lift-off until more than a threshold amount of time has elapsed)), and an input of a fourth type (e.g,, a deep press (e.g., with a first press event that includes an increase in intensity' of a contact above a deep press intensity threshold within a threshold amount of time after initial, touch-down ofthe contact)). In some embodiments, each type of input is associated with dismissing a currently displayed user interface, and performing a corresponding operation, and, optionally, displaying a corresponding user interface associated with the operation.

(00377] With reference to Figure 9 A, the device displays (920) a first user interface (e.g., a user interface of a first application, such as user interface 524, Figure 5B5). While displaying the first user interface, the device detects (904) a first input, and the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interlace arid a request to display a third user interface (e.g., a first press input by a first contact on a home button, such as the first press input by contact 532-a, Figure 5B6). In some embodiments, a press input is defined as an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a light press intensity threshold FIf. (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B6), followed by a reduction ofthe contact intensity below a predefined up-click intensity threshold (e.g., a light press release intensity threshold ITer, as shown in Figure 5B8) or followed by lift-off of the contact that is consistent with a request to transition to a second user interface (e.g,, a single click input to transition to the home screen or to transition to an expanded folder overlaid on the home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3) and a request to transition to a third user interfece (e.g., a double click input to transition to the multi-tasking user interface, such as user interface 528, Figure 5B14).

[00378] In response to detecting the first input, the device starts (906) to display a first animated transition from the first user interface (e.g., the user interface of a first application, such as user interface 524, Figure 5B5) to the second user interface (e.g., the home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on the home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3). In some embodiments, the first animation starts to be displayed in response to detecting an up-click portion ofthe first input (e.g., a decrease in intensity ofthe contact from an intensity above an up-click intensity threshold to an intensity below the up-click intensity' threshold), as shown in Figures 5B50-5B54). In some embodiments, the first animation starts to be displayed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the

123

DK 2016 70738 A1 contact above a him intensity ihr eshold ITh (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A8-5AI I., 5B6,

5B5 7, 5B28, and 5B40), (00379] While the first animated transition is being displayed (e.g., the first animated transition has started but has not yet finished, such that an intermediate state between an beginning and an end of the first animated transition is currently displayed on the display, such as user interface 525-5, Figure 5BI 0), the device detects (908) a second input (e.g., a second press input by contact 532-e, Figure 5B10) (e.g., a second press input, either by the same continuous contact or by a second contact after lift-off of the first contact is detected).

100380) In response to detecting the second input, the device determines whether the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and whether the second input is received at a first time. In accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time (e.g., a second click input is detected at a first time, before a threshold amount of time for detecting a double click input has elapsed), the device interrupts (910) the first animated transition fiom the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition (e.g., the first point in the first animated transition corresponds to the first time), and displays a second animated transition from the first, point in the first animated transition io the third user interface (e.g,, the first animated transition is interrupted by the detection of the second click of fne double-click input at the first point in the first animated 'transition). For example, as shown in Figures 5B10-5B14, the second input (e.g., the second press input by contact 532-e, Figure 5B1Ö) is detected at a first time, before the double click time threshold Toe, and the first animated transition trom the first user interface (e.g., user interface 524, Figure 5B5) to the second user interface (e.g., user interface 522, Figure 5B3) is interrupted at the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., at user interface 525-5, Figure 5B10) and a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., tire second animated transition including user interfaces 526-1, 526-2, and 526-3, Figure 5BI1-5BI3) to die third user interface (e.g., user interface 528, Figure 5BI4) is displayed.

[003811 in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time (e.g., a second click input is detected at a second time.

124

DK 2016 70738 A1 before a threshold amount of time for delect ing a double click input has elapsed), the devier interrupts the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., the first point in die first animated transition corresponds to the first time), and displays a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition (e.g., the first animated transition is iniemrpted by the detection of the second click of the double-click input at the second point in the first animated transition, and thus, the transition to the third user interface starts from there). For example, as shown in Figures 5B21-5B25, the second input (e.g., the second press input by contact 534-e, Figure 5B21) is detected at. a second time, before the double click time threshold Tnc, hut after the first time (e.g., in Figure 5B1.0) and the first animated transition from the first user interface (e.g,, user interface 524, Figure 5B5) to the second user interface (e.g., user interface 522, Figure 5B3) is interrupted at the second point in the first animated transition (e.g., at user interface 525-6, Figure 5B21) that Is after the first point in the first, animated transition (e.g., at. user interface 525-5, Figure 5B1.0) and a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition (e.g., the third animated transition including user interfaces 527-1, 527-2, and 527-3, Figure 5B22-5B24) to the third user interface (e.g., user interface 528, Figure 5B25) is displayed.

[00382 ] Turning now to Figure 9B, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets first criteria (e.g., the fitst criteria requiring that the second input is not detected after the Song press input is detected (e.g., the contact is not maintained for more than a threshold amount of time after the first click event is registered and before the second click event is registered)), and that that the second input Is received at a third time that is after the second time (e.g,, a click that is detected after a threshold amount of time for detecting a double click i nput has elapsed or a click that is detected before the threshold amount of time for detecting a double click but after a threshold amount of time for interrupting the first animated transition, Tj), the device continues to display (912) the first animated transition (e.g., the home screen will be displayed at the end of the first animated transition), In Figures 5B27-5B38 and Figures 5B39-5B48, for example, ihe first animated transition is displayed to completion and the second user interface (e.g , user interface 522) is displayed

125

DK 2016 70738 A1 at the end of the transition (e.g., in Figures 5B35 and 5847,, respectively). For example, in cases where the input turns out to be a single click which is a request to go to the second user interface (e.g., in Figures 5B39-5B48), the animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface is completed sooner than if the device had waited until the double-click time threshold had elapsed without detecting a second click before starting the animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface. As a result.

the user interface is more responsive and efficient, and enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first time and the second time occur before a threshold time for detecting a double-click input (e.g., in Figures 5B5-5B14, Figures 5BI 65B25, and Figures 5B27-5B38) that includes the first input (914). In some embodiments, the third time occurs after the threshold time for detecting a double-click input (e.g., in Figures 5B39-5.B48) that includes the first input [00384] In some embodiments, the second input is a repetition of the first input (918) (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B39~5B48).

[00385] in some embodiments, the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes (920) movement of the first user interface in a first direction (e.g., downward or upward), and the second animated transition includes movement of the first user interface in a second direction (e.g., leftward or rightward) that is distinct from the first direction (e.g., perpendicular to the first direction). For example, in some embodiments, during the first animated transition, the user interface of a first application moves downward toward the bottom of the display (or upward toward the top of the display, as shown in Figures 5B6-5B1O), and upon detection of the second input, the user interface of the first application moves back up (or down) and to the side of the display (e.g... as shown in Figures 5131I-5B14). In some embodiments., ihe user interface is responsive fo each click of a double click input, and the user recei ves visual feedback for each press input he/she enters. The user interface is fluid and dynamically adaptive to the user’s inputs. This improved visual feedback gives the user a better sense of control without requiring any change on the user’s part to alter the way that he. she interacts with the device. This enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when

126

DK 2016 70738 A1 opemting/interaefing with die device) which, additionally. reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to user the device more quickly and efficiently.

[00386] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with a request to display a fourth user interface (e.g., the digital assistant user interlace), distinct from the first, second, and third user interface, (e.g., the contact is maintained for a threshold amount of time after the first, input (e.g.. the first click) is detected, and before any second click is detected, so that a long click is registered), the device interrupts (922) the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a third point in the first animated transition, distinct from the first and second points in the first animated transition (e.g., the third point corresponds to a third time that is a first threshold amount of time (e.g., the long-press time threshold) after the detection of the first input (e.g., the first click)), and displays a fourth animated transition from the third point in the first animated transition to the fourth user interface, and the fourth animated transition is different from the first, second and third animated transitions. For example, after the first dick is detected, the first animated transition to the home screen is started., and if the contact is maintained for a threshold amount of time without an increase in intensity to register a second click, a long press input is registered, and fhe first animated transition is interrupted and the fourth animated transition to the fourth user interface is stated from there (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A15-5A18). In some embodiments, the timer for detecting a long click is started when the down-click of a press input is detected (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A15). In some embodiments, the timer for detecting a double click is started when the up-click of a press input is detected.

[00387] In some embodiments, fhe animated transition toward the second user interface (e.g., the home screes or an expanded folder overlaid on die home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3) is started upon detecting the down-click of tire press input.

In some embodiments, the animated transition toward the second user interface (e.g. , the home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on the home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3) is started upon detecting tire υρ-cliek of die press input (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B50-5B59). In embodiments, where the animated transition toward the second user interface (e.g·, the home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on die home screen, such as n*

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface 522, Figure 5B5) is started upon detecting ihe up-click of the press input, and the timer for detecting the long click is started upon detecting the down-click, the likelihood of confusion of the user as to whether along click or a single click was detected is reduced. In such embodiments, once an up-click is detected and the animated transition to the second user interface is started, the animated transition to the second user interface will not he interrupted by an animation toward the fourth user interface (e.g,, ihe digital assistant user interlace) in such embodiments.

[00388] in some embodiments, the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes (924) movement of the first user interface in a first direction (e.g.. downward), the fourth animated transit ion includes movement of the first user interface in a second direction (e.g., upward) that is opposite the first direction, and the third animated transition is in a third direction that is orthogonal to the first and second directions (e.g., leftward and rightwi [00389] With reference to Figure 9C, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with a request to transition to a fifth user interface (e.g., a deep press input to transition to a user interface) (e.g,, the second Input includes a continued increase of the characteristic intensity of the contact above a second threshold higher than the first intensity threshold after the first input without first decreasing the characteristic intensity of the contact), the device interrupts (926) the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a fourth point in the first animated transition (e.g., the fourth point corresponds to a time that the characteristic intensity increases above the second intensity threshold), and displays a fifth animated transition from the fourth point in the first animated transition to the fifth user interface, wherein the fifth animated transition is different from the first.

second and third (and fourth) animated transitions. In some embodiments, when an initial portion of an input is detected and the initial portion of the input is consistent with .multiple input types and thus corresponds to multiple different operations that would result in multiple different final user interfaces (e.g., first final user interface, second final user interface, third final user interface, fourth final user interface, etc.), the device starts the animated transition toward the first final user interface; while the animated transition toward the first final user interface is in progress, if a subsequent portion of the Input eliminates the possibility that the input Is a request to go to the first final user Interface, the device

128

DK 2016 70738 A1 redirects the current animated transition, toward the second final user interface; while the animated transition toward the second final user interface is in progress, if a subsequent portion of the input eliminates the possibility that tlie input is a request to go to the second final user interface, the device redirects the current animated transition toward the third final user interface. In some embodiments, with suitable designs for the liming and criteria findetecting the different input types, for ihe matching between the input types and operations, and for the animated transitions that correspond to the final user interfaces, the user interface can be made very smooth and efficient, leading to improved operability and efficiency of the device.

(00390] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface, prior to detecting the first input, the device: detects (928) a precursor input (e.g,, detecting the touch-down of the contact and an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a hint intensity threshold Π'η) for the first input and, in response to detecting the precursor input, the device displays a hint animation that includes a start of the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A5-5A6 and described in more detail with respect to method 700 above).

100391] in some embodiments, the first user interface is a user interface of a first application (930) (e.g,, user interface 524, Figure 5B5), and the device generates the first animated transition (and er the second animated transition, and/or the third animated transition) m accordance with a location of a first application launch icon on the second user interface (e.g., in accordance with a location of the Pages icon on user interface 522, Figure 5B3). In some embodiments, the second user interlace is an application launching user interface (eg., user interfece 522, Figure 5B3) that includes a plurality of application launch icons including a first application launch icon that corresponds to the first application (e.g., the Pages icon that corresponds to the Pages application). For example, in some embodiments, the first animated transitions shows that the user interface of tlie first application shrinks toward the first application icon on the home screen (or an expanded folder overlaid on the home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3), as shown in Figures 5B17-5B21).

(00392] In some embodiments, detecting the first input includes (932) detecting a first press input by a first contact on a home button, the first press input including an

129

DK 2016 70738 A1 increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g.. a light press intensity threshold ITj} (e.g.. as shown in Figure 5817) followed by a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a second intensity threshold (e.g., the second intensity threshold is a release intensity threshold that is the same, greater, or s than the press intensity threshold) (e.g., as shown in Figure SB 19).

[00393] In some embodiments, the device generates (934) a first tactile output in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic Intensity of the first, contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a down-click tactile output is generated in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the light press intensity threshold ΠΥ), as shown in Figure 5B.17 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Fiz with a gain of 1).

[00394] In some embodiments, the device generates (936) a second tactile output in response to detecting ihe decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the second intensity threshold (e.g., an up-click tactile output is generated in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity o f the first contact below the light press release intensity threshold ΠΥκ), as shown in Figure 5BI9 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0,5), In some embodiments, die second tactile output Is different from the first tactile output (e.g., with a different amplitude (e.g., a lower amplitude), duration (e.g., a shorter duration), frequency (e.g., a lower frequency), and/or waveform (e.g., a waveform with fewer cycles)) In some embodiments, the second tactile output, is 50% of the first tactile output (e.g., 50% of the amplitude). In some embodiments, the second tactile ouq is the same as the first tactile output. In some embodiments, the tactile outputs for the click and up-click are the same, but with different corresponding tactile audio outputs (e.g,, audio outputs with different, amplitudes, and/or frequencies).

[0Ö395] Turning now to Figure 9D. in some embodiments, in. response to detecting the second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a fourth time that is after the second time (e.g., a second click input is detected at a fourth time, before a threshold amount of time for defecting a double click input has elapsed), the device continues (938) to display ihe first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface, and the device displays a fifth animated transition from an end. of the first animated transition to the third user interface (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B27130

DK 2016 70738 A1

5B381. in some embodiments, the fifth animated transition is different from the second animated transition and the third animated transition.

(00396] For example, the first animated transition is not interrupted by fhe detection of the second click of the double-click input at the second point in the first animated transition, and thus, the transi tion to the third user interface starts from the end of the first animated transition (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B35-5B38). tn some embodiments, when a substantial portion of the transition from the first, user interface to the second user interface has already been completed by the time that the second click of double click input is detected, it is more natural to complete the transition to the second user interface and starts the transition toward the third user interface from second user interface. One advantage in such a design is that the starting point of the third animated transition is a stable user interlace and needs not be customized for each different timing of when the second click of the double click is detected. Another advantage in such designs in which interruption is allowed to happen early on but not after a certain point, is that the animation can start earlier without waiting to see if the second click of a double click is going to be detected, thereby improving the responsiveness of the user interface and reducing user confusion and accidental inputs caused by user confusion. In some embodiments, using a canned animation from the second user interface to the third user interface simplifies the design of the software and improves 'battery life of the device.

(00397J In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input is not. consistent with the request to dispiay the third user interface (e.g,, because the second input is received at a fourth time that is after the third time and does not meet a multiple-click time threshold), the device forgoes transitioning (940) to the third user interface (e.g,, if the second click input is detected after a multiple-click time threshold has elapsed, the clicks are treated as separate clicks and a multitasking user interface that is associated with multiple sequential clicks that meet the multiple-click time threshold Is not displayed). For example, tire first input turns out to be a single click which is a request to go to the second user Interface (e.g., a secondary home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on fhe home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3), and the second input turns out to be another single click which is a request to go from the second user interface (e.g., a secondary' home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on tire home screen, such as user Interface 522, Figure 5B3) to a

135

DK 2016 70738 A1 •fifth user interface (e.g., a primary home screen or a secondary home screen with the folder, such as user interface 520, Figure 5Bi) distinct from the first user interface (e.g., an app UI), the second user interface (e.g., the secondary home screen or an expanded folder overlaid on the home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B3), the third user interface (e.g., the multitasking user interface), and the fourth user interface (e.g... the digital assistant user interface), the animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interlace is completed, and then an. animated transition front the second user interface to the fifth user interface is displayed. In the end, the fifth user interface is displayed. An example of this embodiment is illustrated lu Figures 5B39-5B48.

[00398] It should he understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 9A-9D have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700,1100, 1300, 1500, 1700, and 1900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 900 described above with respect to Figures 9A-9D. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, Intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 900 optionally have one or mote of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1700, and 1900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00399] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 10 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1000 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments, it Is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described In Figure 10 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

132

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00400] As shown in Figure 10.. the electronic, device 1000, includes a display unit 1001 configured to display information (e.g.. touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display). Figure 5 A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 (e.g., display controller 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure IA) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, optionally one or more sensor units 1006 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), optionally one or more tactile output generating units 1007 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1008 coupled with tlie display unit 1002, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004, the optional one or more sensor units 1006, and the optional one or more tactile output generating units 1007. For ease of illustration, Figure 10 shows display unit 1002 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 as integrated with electronic device 1000, however, in some embodiments one or both of these units are hi communication with the electronic device, although the units remain physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3). In some embodiments, the processing unit, includes a displaying unit (e.g,, displaying unit 1010), an input detecting unit (e.g., input detecting unit 1012), a determining unit (e.g., determining unit 1014), a tactile output providing unit (e.g., tactile output providing unit 1016), and a characteristic intensity detecting unit 1018).

[00401 ] In some embodiments, the processing unit (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 1 Ö1Ö-.1018) is configured to: display a first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1010); while displaying the first user interface, detect a first input (e.g., with the input detecting unit 1012), the first input being consistent, with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface; in response to detecting tlie first input start to display a first animated transition from the first user interlace to a second user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1010); while the first animated transition is being displayed, detect a second input (e.g.., with the input detecting unit 1.012); and in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time; interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interlace to the second user interlace at a first point in the first animated transition fe.g , with the displaying unit 1010)., and display a second animated

13?

DK 2016 70738 A1 transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface {e.g.., with the displaying unit 1010); and in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with die request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after fhe first time: interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in fhe first animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1010), and display a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein die third animated transition is different from the second animated transition (e.g,, with the displaying unit 1010), (004(12] In some embodiments, fhe processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets first criteria, and that that the second input is received at a third time that is after the second time, continue to display the first animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1010).

(00403] In some embodiments, the first time and the second time occur before a threshold time for detecting a double-click input that includes the first input.

(00404] in some embodiments, the third time occurs after fhe threshold time for defecting a double-click input that includes the first input.

(00405] in some embodiments, the second input is a repetition of the first input.

(00406] in some embodiments., the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes movement of the first user interface in a first direction, and tire second animated transition includes movement of the first user interface in a second direction that is distinct from the first direction.

(00407] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with a request to display a fourth user interface, distinct from the first, second.

and third user interfaces: interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a third point in the first animated transition, distinct from the first and second points in the first animated transition (e.g.. with the displaying unit 1010), and display a fourth animated transition from the third point in the first animated transition

134

DK 2016 70738 A1 to the fourth user interface, wherein the fourth animated transition is different from the first, second and third animated transitions (e.g., with the displaying unit 5010).

)00408] In some embodiments, the first animated transition from the first user mterfece to the second user interface includes movement of the first user interface in a first direction, the fourth animated transition includes movement ofthe first user interface in a second direction that is opposite the first direction, and the third animated transition is in a third direction that is orthogonal to the first, and second directions.

)00409] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to; in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that die second input is consistent with a request to transition to a fifth user interface; interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a fourth point in the first animated transition (e.g. , with the displaying unit 1010), and display a fifth animated transition from the fourth point in the first animated transition to the fifth user interface (e.g,, with the displaying unit 1010), the fifth animated transition being different from the first, second and third animated transitions.

)00410} in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: while displaying the first user interface, prior to detecting the first input: detect a precursor input for the first input (e.g,, with the input detecting unit 1012); in response to detecting the precursor input, display a hint animation wherein the hint animation includes a start of the first animated transition .from the first user interface to the second user interface (e.g,, with the displaying unit 1010).

)00411] In some embodiments, the first user interface is a user interface of a first application, the processing unit is configured to generate the first animated transition in accordance with a location of a first application launch icon on the second user interface.

{00412] In some embodiments, detecting the first input includes detecting a first press input by a first contact on a home button, wherein the first press input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity ofthe first contact above a first intensity threshold followed by a decrease in the characteristic intensitv of the first contact below' a second intensity

135

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00413] In some embodiments, the processing unii is configured to; generate a first tactile output in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g. , with the tactile output generating unit 1016).

100414] in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to; generate a second tactile output in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the second intensity threshold (e.g., with the tactile output generating unit 1016).

(00415] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a fourth time that is after the second time: continue to display the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit .1010), and display a fifth animated transition from an end of the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the fifth animated transition is different from the second animated transition and the third animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1010).

(00416] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input is not consistent with the request to display the third user interface, forgo transitioning to the third user interface.

(00417( The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures I A and 3) or application-specific chips, (00418] The operations described above with reference to Figures 9A-9D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1Α-ΓΒ or Figure 10, For example, displaying operation 902, detection operation 904, responding operation 906, detection operation 908, and responding operation 910 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1, A respective event recognizer 180

136

DK 2016 70738 A1 of application 136-1 compares the event information io respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location oh the touch-sensitive surtace (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or ohject updater 177 to update the application internal state 192, In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear io a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1 A-I B.

)00419) Figures 11 A-1 IE are flow diagrams illustrating a method ί 100 of home button configuration in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1100 is performed at an electronic device (e.g,, device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A.) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface and/or a respective button of the device (e.g.. a virtual or physical home button). In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensi ties of contacts with a home button of the device (e.g,, a physical home button or a virtual home button). In some embodiments, the method 1100 is governed by instructions that are stored in a computerreadable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure 1 A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 1100 as performed by the device 100. Some operations in method 1100 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is., optionally, changed.

)00420) Method 1100 relates to a home button configuration process during which a user selects and tries out a plural ity of tactile output settings for a home button before selecting a tactile output setting for the home button on the device. During the home button configuration process, the normal functions of the home button are suspended, while the tactile output corresponding to the currently selected tactile output setting for the home

137

DK 2016 70738 A1 burton is generated in response to a press input detected on the borne button Allowing the user to try out different tactile output settings for a burton press in a home button configuration user interface before eommittina to a most favored settina makes the home button better conform to fhe user’s particular preference and expectation of how a button press should feel, 'fhe home button configuration user interlace makes the user-device Interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when opemting/mieraeimg with the device) which additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

[004211 In some embodiments, fhe device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device (e.g., a physical home button or a virtual home button). In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with die touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-sensitive display, [004221 With reference to Figure 11 A, the device displays (1102), on the display, a home button configuration user interface (e.g., user interface 564, Figure 5CS) that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button (e.g,, a first tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 230Hz, a second tactile output pattem such as MiniTap 270Hz, and a third tactile output pattem such as MiniTap 300Hz), and the home button is available on the device (e.g., persistently displayed at a respective location or located at. a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display) in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type (e.g., a press input or a press and release input that is detected via the depression of a mechanical switch or by comparing an intensity of a contact on the home button to activation criteria that are based on one or more intensity thresholds as described in greater detail with reference to methods 700,900, 1300,1500, and 1700) on the home button (e.g., and, optionally, redisplay a previously displayed user interface such as a previous view of an application or a system user interface such as a home screen of the device, a multitasking user interface, or a virtual assistant user interface). Other aspects of configuring the haptics for home button activation are described iu greater detail with reference to method 1900.

138

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00423] While displaying the home button configuration. user interface, the device detects (1104) selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings (e.g,, as shown in Figure 5C13). While the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, the device detects (1105) a first input of the first type on the home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 5CI.5).

(00424] in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, the device determines whether the respective tactile output setting is a first or a second tactile output setting for the home button. In accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, the device provides (1106), via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting te.g,, a fimt tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 230Hz, as shown In Figure 4L) for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g., foregoing display of the home screen), as shown in Figure 5CI5. in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, the device provides (1106), via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output (distinct iron? the first tactile output (e.g., a second tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 270Hz, as shown in Figure 4N)) that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g., foregoing display of the home screen), as shown in Figure 5C9, In some embodiments, when the home button configuration user interface is displayed, the device suppresses operations that normally occur when the home button is activated (e.g., by a touch input), such as replacing display of the currently displayed screen with display of a home screen.

(00425] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, the device also determines whether the respective tactile output setting is a third tactile output setting (different from the first and second tactile output settings), in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the third tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting and the second tactile output setting, for the home button, the device provides (1iOS), via die one or more tactile output generators, a third tactile output (distinct from the first tactile output and the second tactile output (e.g,, a third tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 300Hz, as shown In Figure 4P))

139

DK 2016 70738 A1 thai corresponds ίο the third tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interlace (e.u.. foregoing displav of the home screen), as shown in Figure 50 2. In some embodiments, when the home button configuration user interfece is displayed, the device suppresses operations that normally occur when the home button is activated te.g., by a touch input), such as replacing display of the currently displayed screen with display of a home screen.

26] Turning now to Figure I IB, in some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile ou tpu t setting of the home button, the device presents (1110) a prompt requesting a user to provide an input of the first type on the home button (e.g., display a prompt to press the home button with displayed text such as “try it out”). For example, in Figure 5CI4, user interface 568 includes a prompt: “Press the Home button to try it.” (00427( In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different frequencies and the same waveform (1112) (e.g,, both the first and the second tactile outputs are MiniTaps, hut with different frequencies (e.g., 230Hz and 270Hz, respectively, as shown in Figures 4L and 4N, respectively)).

(00428] br some embodiments , in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button; in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting Is the first tactile output setting for the home button, the device provides (1114) a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5C15 and 4L); and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, the device provides (1114) a second audio output concurrently with the second tactile output (e.g., as shown in Figures 5C9 and 4N). In some embodiments, the second audio output is distinct fiom the first audio output, and the second tactile output is different from the first tactile output t e.g., as shown in

Figures 4N and 4L). In some embodiments, a specific tactile output is paired with a corresponding audio output, so when the tactile output is generated in a different, context, the same corresponding audio output is generated with the tactile output (e.g., as shown in Figure 4K).

(00429( in some embodiments, providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button includes (1118) providing the first tactile

140

DK 2016 70738 A1 output (e.g., a tactile output with the first tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 230Hz with a gain of ί) in response to detecting a first portion ofthe first input ofthe first type (e.g., a down-click that corresponds to au increase of a characteristic intensity of a contact above a down-click intensity threshold (e.g., ΠΤ), as shown in Figures 508 and the upper portion of Figure 4L), and the device, in response to detecting tire first input ofthe first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provides, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first additional tactile output (e.g., an additional tactile output with a tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 230Hz with a gain of 0.5, as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 4L) in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type (e.g., an up-click that corresponds to a decrease ofthe characteristic intensity ofthe contact below an up-click intensity threshold (e.g., Hj. or another threshold intensity value (e.g,, ITer) at a lower intensity than ITl)). In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the first additional tactile output have different amplitudes and the same waveform (e.g., the haptic for the down-click is stronger than the haptic for the up-click, but both are MiniTaps). in some embodiments, the first, additional tactile output (e.g., the haptic lor the up-click, as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 4L, for example) is 50% of the tactile gain and 50% of the audio gain of the first, tactile output (e.g., the haptic for the down-click, as shown in the upper portion of Figure 4L , for example).

[00430] In some embodiments, the device provides (1118) a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output, in response to delecting the first portion ofthe first input of the first type; and the device provides (11.18) a first additional audio output concurrently with the first additional tactile output, in response to delecting the second portion of the first input of the first type (e.g., as shown in Figure 4L). In some embodiments, the first audio output and the first additional audio output have different amplitudes and the same waveform. In some embodiments, the amplitudes of the first audio output and the first additional audio output differ by a first amount, the amplitudes ofthe first tactile output and the first additional tactile output differ hy a second amount, distinct from the first amount (1120). For example, in some embodiments, if the amplitude additional tactile output for the up-click of a click input is 90% ofthe amplitude of the tactile output for the down-click ofthe click input, the amplitude for the additional audio

145

DK 2016 70738 A1 output for the up-click of the click input is 811% of the amplitude of the audio output for the down-click of the click input).

Turning now to Figure 11C, in some embodiments, pros iding the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the second tactile output (e.g., a tactile output with a second tactile output pattern such as Mini Tap 270Hz with a gain of 1) in response to detecting a first portion ofthe first input ofthe first type (e.g., a down-click that corresponds to an increase of a characteristic intensity of a contact above a down-click intensity threshold (e.g., ITjj, as shown in Figures 5C9 and the upper portion of Figure 4N), in some embodiments, the device, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, provides (1122), via the one or more tactile output generators, a second additional tactile output (e.g., a tactile output with a tactile output pattern such as MiniTap 270Hz with a gain of 0.5, as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 4N) in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type (e.g., an upclick that corresponds to a decrease of the characteristic intensity of the contact below an up-click intensity threshold (e.g., ITt or another threshold intensity value (e.g., IT·») at a lower intensity than IT}.)). In some embodiments, the second tactile output and the second additional tactile output have different amplitudes and the same waveform (e.g., the tactile output for the down-click is stronger than the tactile output for the up-click, but both are MiniTaps). in some embodiments, the second additional tactile output (e.g., the haptic for the up-click, as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 4N, for example) is 50% of the tactile gain and 50% of the audio gain ofthe second tactile output (e.g., the haptic for the downclick, as shown in the upper portion of Figure 4N, for example).

[00432] In some embodiments , in response to detecting se lection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, the device displays (1124) a first animated indication that includes movement of a representation of t he first tactile output setting toward the home button, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for tlie home button, the device displays (1124) a second animated indication that

142

DK 2016 70738 A1 includes movement of a representation of the second tactile output setting toward the home button.

(00433] In some embodiments, the representation of the first tactile output setting and the representation of the second tactile output setting have the same shape as the home button (1126) (e.g., the representations of the tactile output settings and the home button are both circular). Ia some embodiments, the representations of the tactile output settings include a tip that points to the home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 5C8).

(00434] In some embodiments, the first animated indication Includes (1128) an animated representation of a first tactile output characteristic (e.g., first amplitude, frequency, waveform, number of cycles, and/or a combination of two or more of the above) associated with the first tactile output setting, and the second animated indication includes an animated representation of a second tactile output characteristic (e.g,, second amplitude, .frequency, waveform, number of cycles, and/or a combination of two or more of the above) associated with the second tactile output setting.

[00435] With reference now to Figure 1 ID, in response to detecting the first Input of the first type on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, the device changes (1130) an appearance of a representation of the first tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, show a flickering or a color change of the representation of the first tactile output setting (e.g., the button-shaped icon that represents the first tactile output setting)), and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting Is tbe second tactile output setting for the home button, the device changes (1130) an appearance of a representation of the second tactile output setting in die home button configuration user interface (e g., show a flickering or a color change of the representation of the second tactile output setting te.g., tire button-shaped icon that represents the second tactile output setting)).

(00436] In some embodiments, while displaying the home button configuration user interface, the device displays (1132) a first affordance (e.g,, a “Done” icon. Figure 5C16) that, when activated, causes dismissal of the home button configuration user interface (e.g., user interface 568, Figure 506), and causes display of another user interface (e.g., the user interface that was displayed prior to displaying the home button configuration user

143

DK 2016 70738 A1 interface) in place of the home button configuration user interface (e.g., user interlace 562, Figure 507).

In some embodiments, while displaying the home button configuration user interface and the first affordance, the dev ice detects (II34) acti cation of the fi rst a ffordance (e.g., as shown in Figure 506). In response to detecting the activation of the first affordance, fhe device (1134 ): ceases to display the home button configuration user interface; and displays (1134) a respecti ve user interface that is distinct from the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, as shown in Figure 5C17) (e.g,, redisplaying a first user interface that was displayed immediate prior to displaying the home button configuration user interface such as a device settings user interface, or displaying a next user interface in a device set-up user interface sequence). While displaying the respective user interface, the device detects (1134) a second input of the first type on the home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 50 8); and, in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button, tlie device (1134): ceases to display the respective user interface (e.g., the device settings user interface, or the next user interface in. a device set up user inter face sequence); displays (1134) a third user interface (e.g., the home screen, such as user interface 510, Figure 509) that is distinct from the respective user interface; aud provides (1134), via the one or more tactile output generators, a respective tactile output that corresponds to the respective tactile output setting for the home button that was selected at the time when the affordance was activated (e.g., providing the first tactile output (and, optionally, the first additional tactile output) if the first tactile output setting was selected (e.g., as shown in Figure 50 8), providing the second tactile output (and, optionally, the second additional tactile output) if the second tactile output setting was selected, and providing fhe third tactile output (and, optional ly, the third additional tactile output) if the third tactile output setting was selected).

100438] In some embodiments, white the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, the device detects (1136) a first input of a second type on the home button (e.g., the first type is a single click Input, and the second type is a double click input, a hard click input, or a long click input), the second type is distinct from the first type. In response to defecting tlie first input of the second type on tlie home button: in accordance with a determination that die respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, the device provides (1136), via the one or more tactile output

144

DK 2016 70738 A1 generators, the first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface fe.g., foregoing display of the home screen); and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, the device provides (1136 i, via the one or more tactile output generators, ihe second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

[00439] it should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures I f A-11E have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended fo indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700,900,1300, 1500, 1700, and 1900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1100 described above with respect to Figures 11 A-11E. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 1100 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g,, methods 700, 900,1300,

15ÖÖ, 1700, and 1900). For brevity, these details are not. repeated here, [00440] in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 12 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1200 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 12 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

145

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00441 ] As shown in Figure 12. the electronic device 1200, includes a display unit 1201 configured to display information (e.g.. touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display). Figure 1 A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 (e.g., display controller 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure IA) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, optionally one or more sensor units 1206 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensiti ve surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), one or more tactile output generating units 1207 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1208 coupled with the display unit 1202, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204, and the optional one or more sensor units, and the one or more tactile output generating units. For ease of i llustra tion, Figure 12 shows display unit 1202 and touchsensitive surface unit 1204 as integrated with electronic device 1200, however, in some embodiments one or both of these units are in communication with the electronic device, although the units remain physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3). in some embodiments, the processing unit includes a displaying unit (e.g., displaying unit 12.10), an input detecting unit (e.g,, input detecting unit. 1212), a tactile output providing unit (e.g., tactile output providing unit 1214), and an audio output providing unit (e.g., audio output providing unit 1216).

(004421 In some embodiments, the processing unit (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 1210-1216) is configured to: display, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality o f different tactile output settings for the home button (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210), the home button being available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button; while di splaying the home button configuration user interface, detect selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of die plurality of different tactile output settings t e.g , with the input detecting unit 1212): while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input of the first type on the home button (e.g , with the input detecting unit 1212); and, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button; in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output

146

DK 2016 70738 A1 setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 12I 4); and, in accordance with a determination that tire respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 1214).

('00443] in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting fhe first input of the first type on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a third tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting and the second tactile output setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third tactile output that corresponds to the third tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 12141.

[00444j in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button, present a prompt requesting a user to provide an input of the first type on the home button (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210).

[00445] In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different frequencies and the same waveform.

[00446] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: hi response to detecting the first input of the first type on fhe home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1216); and, in accordance with a determination that fhe respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, provide a second audio output concurrently with the second tactile output (e.g,, with the audio output providing unit 1216).

[00447] In some embodiments, providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for fhe home button includes providing the first tactile output

147

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first additional tactile output in response to defecting a second portion of ihe first input ofthe first, type (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 121-4).

(00448] In some embodiments, the processing unit, is configured to: provide a first, audio output concurrently with the first, tactile output, in response to detecting the first portion ofthe first input of the first type (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1216); and provide a first additional audio output concurrently with the first additional tactile output, in response to detecting the second portion of the first input of ihe firsf type (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1216).

)00449] In some embodiments, the amplitudes of the first audio output the first additional audio output differ by a. first amount, the amplitudes of the first tactile output and the first additional tactile output differ by a second amount, distinct from the first amount.

)00450} In some embodiments, providing the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the second tactile output in response to detecting a first portion ofthe first input ofthe first type; and the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type on the home button, in accordance with a detenninaiion that, the respective tactile output setting is the second tacti le output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output, generators, a second additional tactile output In response to detecting a second portion ofthe first Input ofthe first type (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 1214), )00451] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting selection of tire respective tactile output setting ofthe home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, display a first animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the first tactile output setting toward the home button (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210). and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, display a second

148

DK 2016 70738 A1 animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the second tactile output setting toward the home button {e.g., with the displaying unit 1210).

[0Θ452] In some embodiments, the representation of the first tactile output setting and the representation of the second tactile output setting have the same shape as the home button.

In some embodiments, the first animated indication includes an animated representation of a first tactile output characteristic associated with the first tactile output setting, and the second animated indication includes an animated representation of a second tactile output characteristic associated with the second tactile output setting.

j00454] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, change an appearance of a representation of the first, tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210), and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tact ile output sett ing for the home button, change an appearance of a representation of the second tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 12.10).

[00455] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: while displaying the home button configuration user interface, display a first affordance that, when activated, causes dismissal of the home button configuration user interface, and causes display of another user interlace in place of the home button configuration user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 12.10).

[00456] in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to. while displaying the home button configuration user interface and the first affordance, detect activation of the first affordance; and in response to detecting the activation of the first affordance: cease to display tire home button configuration user interface (e.g,, with the displaying unit 1210): and display a respective user interface that is distinct from the home button configuration user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210); while displaying the respective user interface, detect a second input of the first type on the home button (e.g., with the input detecting unit 1212 ); and, in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the

149

DK 2016 70738 A1 home button: cease to dispiay the respective user interface {e.g.. with the displaying unit i 210); display a third user interface that is distinct from the respective user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1210); and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a respective tactile output that corresponds to the respective tactile output setting for the home button that was selected at the time when the affordanee was activated (e.g.. with the tactile output providing unit 1214).

[00457] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input of a second type on the home button, the second type is distinct from the first type; and, in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting Is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, the first tactile output that corresponds to ihe first tactile output setting for die home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 1214 ); and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the borne button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user mterfaee (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 1214), [00458] The operations in the information. processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application-specific chips.

[00459] optionally,

The operations described above with reference to Figures 11A implemented by components depicted in f igures 1A-1B or Figure 12. For example, displaying operation 1.102, detection operation .1.104, detection operation 1105. and responding operation 1106 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event, handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether

150

DK 2016 70738 A1 a first contact at a ftrsi location on ihe touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 io update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handier 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[ÖÖ46Ö] Figures 13A-13D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1300 of controlling user interface haptics arid home button haptics in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1300 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1 A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a. touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display, in some embodiments, ihe display is separate from the touchsensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device (e.g., a physical home button or a virtual home button), in some embodiments, the method 1300 is governed by instructions that are stored in a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a non-iransitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors of the e lectronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure I A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 1300 as performed by the device 100. Some operations in method 1300 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00461 j As described below, method 1300 relates to separately controlling haptic feedback generation for user interface events and haptic feedback generation for activation of a persistent button (e.g., a virtual home button or a non-mechanical home or back button) on a device, such that when haptic feedback generation is disabled for user interface events on the device via a tactile output setting (e.g., an on/off toggle for tactile output generation), the haptic feedback generation for activation of the persistent button remains enabled. By

155

DK 2016 70738 A1 allowing such separate control, ihe haptic feedback for activation of the persistent button is not inadvertently disabled bv a user when the user merely wishes to turn off the user interface haptic feedback, thus avoiding user confusion and avoiding reduction of operability and effi ciency of human-machine interface of the device due to the user contusion. Furthermore, this separate control also allows die user to freely disable general user interface haptic feedback in the interest of saving battery power and reduce distractions due to unnecessary haptics feedback in certain contexts, without the fear of compromising the useful haptic feedback associated with activation of the persistent button (which may or may not he accompanied by a visual change in the user interface).

(00462] In some embodiments, the device provides a tactile output control setting (e.g., Sounds and Haptics Setting) that allows the user to turn on and turn off user interface tactile output generation at the device (00463] in general, the device generates user interface tactile output of various types in response to direct interactions with a user interface element, e.g., selection, manipulation, drag, drop, and/or activation of the user interface element through a focus selector (e.g., a mouse pointer or contact) that is placed in proximity to the user interface element when a user input is detected. The user interface tactile outputs are generally accompanied by visual changes in the user interface. For example, in some embodiments, the device provides a tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap (l50H.z)) in response to an input that picks up an item in a user interface (e.g., a long press input by a sustained contact at a location that corresponds to the Item), and the user interface shows the object jumping up toward the surface of the display and the tactile output is timed to coincide with the end of the movement, of the object, in addition to user interface tactile outputs, the device also generates outputs in response to activation of a persistent button (e.g., a virtual home button or a non-mechanical home or back button) on the device . The activation of the button may or may not he accompanied with corresponding visual changes in tire user interface. For example, in response to a press input on a home button, the device generates a tactile output and dismisses a currently displayed user interface and displays the home screen. In. response to another press input on fhe home button, the device generates a tactile output for the button press, but continues to display the home screen. Therefore, in some contexts, the device allows the user to turn off user interface tactile outputs, e.g., to conserve power or reduce distraction. However, fhe device also prevents the user from inadvertently turning off the

152

DK 2016 70738 A1 tactile output generation for the persistent button, when the user merely wishes to turn ol the user interface tactile outputs.

[08464] In some enibodiments, the device provides non-visual feedback that includes both an audio output component and a tactile output component. Certain types of audio outputs are paired with visual changes In the user interface or exist independent of any visual changes in the user interface. For example, audio alerts, ringtones, music clips, can be played independent of tactile outputs, and serve to alert tbe user of some changes in the user interface or the state of the device. In some embodiments, the device genera tes certain audio outputs that are specifically tied fo and enhance or supplement a tactile output. These types of audio outputs are referred to as “haptic audio outputs” herein. In some embodiments, a non-visual feedback profile includes a tactile output pattern for a tactile output and an audio output pattern for a haptic audio output that accompanies the tactile output, to invoke certain haptic sensations in a user. The interplay between the frequencies, amplitudes, waveforms, and/or timings of the haptic audio output and the corresponding tactile output creates a richer and more nuanced haptic sensation in the user, and makes the non-visual feedback more salient to the user, in some contexts, the device allows the user to control the generation of haptic audio output (e.g.., tbe haptic audio outputs that correspond to user interface tactile outputs, and/or the haptic audio outputs that correspond to the button tactile outputs) using the general volume control and/or mute control, e.g., to conserve power or reduce distraction. However, the device also prevents the user from inadvertently turning off the haptic audio for device tactile outputs (e.g.. the audio that accompanies the tactile outputs for acti vation of the persistent button).

|00465| With reference to Figure .13A, the device displays (1302), on the display, a first user interface. In some embodiments, while display of the first user interface is maintained, detection of inputs remains enabled for the first user interface and for a home button of 'the device. In some embodiments, the home button is available on die device (e.g,, persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display) In a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type (e.g,, a press input or a press and release input that is detected via die depression of a mechanical switch or by comparing an intensity of a contact on the home button to activation criteria that, are based on one or more Intensity thresholds as described above in greater detail with

Xé.·

153

DK 2016 70738 A1 reference to methods 700.. 900, i 500. and I 700) on the home button {e.g.., and. optionally, redisplay a previously displayed user interface such as a previous view of an application, or a system user interface such as a home screen of the device, a multitasking· user interface, or a virtual assistant user interface). Other aspects of configuring the haptics tor home button activation, are described in. greater detail with reference to methods 1.100 and 1900.

(00466] While displaying the first user interface, the device detects (1304) a first input of a. first type directed to the first user interface (e.g., a press input by a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive display that, corresponds to an activatable object or activatable portion in the first user interface).

In response io detecting the first input of the first type (e.g,, a press input that includes a press down input followed by a release input ) directed to tite first user interface, the device determines whether user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device (e.g., based on tactile output toggle control setting 675 m Figures 6ΑΊ and 6BI). In accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device (e.g., the haptics toggle setting or tactile output toggle setting for the electronic device is on, as shown in Figure 6A1), the device performs (1306) a first operation and provides, via the one or more tactile output generator, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation. For example, as shown in Figures 6A4-6A8, tactile outputs are generated in conjunction with displaying quick action menu 608 and moving through each menu option in the quick action menu in response to an input by contact 604.

In another example, in Figures 6A11-6A1S, tactile outputs are generated in conjunction with displaying preview 628 and moving past a hidden threshold for archiving art e-mail message in response to an input by contact 624. in another example, in Figures 6A18-6A22, tactile outputs are generated in conjunction with displaying preview 640 and displaying content displaying user interface 644 in response to an input by contact 636.

('00468] in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled (e.g., a haptics toggle setting or tactile output toggle setting for the electronic more discrete tactile outputs that are generated in conjunction with user interface changes that correspond to different portions of the input) that corresponds to the first operation. For device is off), the device performs (1306) the first operation, and forgoes providing at least a portion of the first tactile output (e.g., the first tactile output optionally includes one or

154

DK 2016 70738 A1 example, as shown in Figures 6B4-6B8. device forgoes generation of tactile output in conjunction with moving through each menu option in the quick action menu 608 in response to an input hy contact 605. In another example, in Figures 6B11-6B! 8, the device forgoes generation of tactile output in conjunction with moving past a hidden threshold for archiving an e-mail message in response to an input by contact 625.

[00469] After performing the first operation (and without altering the enabled/disabled status of user interface tactile outputs on the device), the device detects (1308) a second input of the first type (e.g., a single click that includes a press down input followed by a release input) on the home button (e.g., home button 650 in Figures 6A25 and 6B25). In response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button, the device performs (1310) a second operation that is associated with the home button (e.g., dismissing the first application and displaying a home screen, multitasking user interface, or virtual assistant user interface) and provides, via the one or more tactile output generators.

tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button (e.g., a down-click tactile output and/or an up-click tactile output), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device (e.g., the generation of the tactile output associated with pressing the home button is independent of the haptics toggle setting or tactile output toggle setting). For example, the device generates a tactile output in conjunction with activation of home button 650 in Figures 6A25-6A26 and Figures 6B25-6B26, regardless of the on/off status of the user interface tactile output setting 674 in Figures 6A1 and 6ΒΪ.

109470] Turning now to Figure S3B, in some embodiments, the first user interface is a user interface ofa first application, the first operation is (1312) an operation of the first application, and the second operation includes dismissing the first application (e.g., suspending or exiting the first, application, and displaying the home screen in place of the user interface of the first application or displaying a previously displayed user interface in place of the first application). For example, the first operation is for presenting preview 640 in the Mail application, and/or presenting content display user interface 644 in the Mail application, and the second operation is dismissing the user interface of the Mail application and displaying the home screen in place of the user interface of the Mail application, as shown in Figures 6A19-6A26 and Figures 6B19-6B26,

155

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00471 ] In. some embodiments, after performing the first operation (and without altering the enableddiisabled status of user interface tactile outputs on the device), the device detects (1314) a first input of a second type (e.g., a double click (e.g,, with at least two down-clicks separated by one up-click)), distinct from the first type, on the home button. In response to detecting the first input ofthe second iype on the home button, the device performs a third operation (distinct from the second operation) that is associated with the home button (e.g., dismissing the currently displayed user Interface, and displaying the multitasking user interface). In response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button, the device also provides, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of'the home button (e.g., a first down-click tactile output, and/or a first up-click tactile output followed by a second down-click tactile output and/or a second up-click tactile output), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at die electronic device (e.g., the generation ofthe tactile output associated with pressing the home button is independent of the haptics toggle setting). In some embodiments, the tactile outputs for the inputs ofthe first type and fhe tactile outputs for inputs ofthe second type are different, e.g,, have different tactile output, patterns, or di fferent numbers of discrete tactile outputs, etc.

[00472J In some embodiments, after performing the first operation (and without altering the enahled/tiisabled status of user interface tactile outputs on fhe device), the device detects (1316) a first input of a third type (e.g., a long click (e.g., with one downclick that, is held for at. least, a threshold amount of time)), distinct from the first, type (and the second type), on the home button. In response to detecting the first input of the third type on the home button, the device performs a fourth operation, distinct from the second operation (and fhe third operation), that is associated with the home button (e.g., dismissing the currently displayed user interface, and displaying fhe virtual assistant user interface), in response to detecting fhe first input of fhe third type on die home button, the device also provides, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation ofthe home button (e.g., a first down-click tactile output), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at die electronic device (e.g., the generation of the tactile output associated with pressing the home button is independent of the haptics toggle setting or the tactile output toggle setting).

156

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00473) In. some embodiments, the first tactile output (and other tactile outputs for user interface interactions) and the tactile output that is associated with activation of'the home button (and other tactile outputs for home button interactions) are provided (3 318) by the same one or more actuators of the one or more tactile output generators, [00474) In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern of a corresponding tactile output that is provided in response to a respective input of the firsi type on the home button is user-adjustable (1320) (e.g., by software instructions in accordance with a home button tactile output setting selected in a home button configuration user interface).

[00475) With reference now to f igure 13C, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input offhe first type on the home button, the device provides (1322) an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, and without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device. For example, in some embodiments, in the scenarios shown in Figures 6Å25 and 6Å26, the device generates haptic audio outputs to accompany the tactile outputs to indicate acti vation of the home button, without regard to the audio output mute/uamute setting of the device. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are accompanied by corresponding audio outputs to provide richer texture and differentiation between the feedback for different types of inputs and user interface responses. The audio outputs that, correspond to the home button tactile outputs are optionally not controlled by the audio control setting (e.g., mute/unraute control, and/or volume control) on the device, such that the user would not inadvertently alter carefully designed pairings between the tactile outputs and corresponding audio outputs for the home button. By providing haptic feedback audio even when general device audio output has been disabled (e.g., simulating the audio feedback that the user would expect from activation of a hardware button), the operability and efficiency of the device is improved, e.g., through reduction of unintended results, and user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device, which additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device. Home button haptic audio output patterns and corresponding tactile output patterns are described in greater detail with reference to Figures 4H and4Q, for example.

1004761 In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second Input of the first type on the home button, the device provides (1324) an audio output with the tactile output

157

DK 2016 70738 A1 thai is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to w hether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, and a volume of the audio output is independent of a current volume setting at the device. For example, in some embodiments, in fhe scenarios shown in Figures 6A25 and 6A26, the device generates haptic audio outputs to accompany the tactile outputs to indicate activation of the home button, without regard to the audio output volume setting of the device. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are accompanied by corresponding audio outputs to provide richer texture and differentiation between the feedback for different types of inputs and user interface responses. Fhe volume of the audio outputs that correspond to tactile outputs are not controlled by the volume control on the device, such that the user would not inadvertently alter the carefully designed pairings between the tactile outputs and corresponding audio outputs with the appropriate amplitudes. By decoupling the control of the haptic feedback audio volume from the control of the volume of general device audio (e.g., simulating the audio feedback that the user would expect from activation of a hardware button), the operability and efficiency of the device is improved, e.g., through reduction of unintended results, and user mistakes when operatlng/inieracting with the device, which additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of fhe device. Home button haptic audio output patterns and corresponding tactile output patterns are described in greater detail with reference to Figures 4! 1 and 4Q, for example.

(00477] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface and hi accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled (e.g., the haptics toggle setting or tactile output toggle setting for the electronic device is on), die device determines whether audio outputs are muted at the device. In accordance with a determination that audio outputs are not muted at the device, the device provides (1326) an audio output with the first tactile output, in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are muted at the device, the device forgoes providing the audio output with the first tactile output. For example, in some embodiments, in the scenarios shown in Figures 6A1-6A8 and 6A9-6A17, the device generates haptic audio outputs to accompany the tactile outputs to indicate activation of the home button only if the audio output is not muted at the device. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are accompanied by cotresponding audio outputs to provide richer texture and differentiation between die feedback for different types of inputs and user interface responses When the

158

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface tactile outputs are enabled, as audio outputs are not the only means for providing feedback for interactions with the user interface, allowing the user to turn off the haptics audio via the general audio mute toggle setting saves battery power without seriously impact performance and operability of the device, (00478( In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first typte directed to the first user interface and in accordance with a determination that user interlace tactile outputs are enabled (e.g., the haptics toggle setting or tactile output toggle setting for the electronic device is on), the device determines a level at. which audio outputs are currently set. In accordance wife a determination feat audio outputs set to a first level at the device, fee device provides (1328) an audio output with the first tactile output at a first volume and is determined based on the first level of the audio outputs at the device. In accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a second level at the deviceproviding the audio output with the first tactile output at a second volume that is different from the first volume and is determined based on the second level of fee audio outputs at the device. For example, in some embodiments, in fee scenarios shown in Figures 6A1-6A8 and 6A9-6A17, the device generates haptic audio outputs to accompany the tactile outputs to indicate activation of the home button, and the amplitude offne haptic audio outputs are adjusted in accordance with a current volume setting at the device. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are accompanied by corresponding audio outputs to provide richer texture and differentiation bet wen fee feedback for different types of inputs and user interface responses. When fee user interface tactile outputs are enabled, allowing fee user some control over how loud or faint haptic audio outputs are played allow fee user to tailor the feedback to his/her particular preference, thus improving the performance and operabili ty of the device.

(00479( Turning now to Figure 13D. in some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to fee first user interface and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled (e.g., the haptics toggle setting for the electronic device is off), fee device forgoes providing (1330) the audio output with the first tactile output, without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device. For example, in some embodiments, in the scenarios shown in Figures 6B1-6B8, 6B9-6B17, and 6B20-6B23, the device does not generate haptic audio outputs to accompany the tactile outputs that are generated in conjunction with displaying quick action

159

DK 2016 70738 A1 menu 6()8 (f igure 6B4), preview 628 (Figure 6BI3). preview 640 (Figure 6B22). and user interface 644 (Figure 6B23) regardless of whether audio output is muted at the device.

(00480] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled (e.g., the haptics toggle setting for the electronic device is off), the device providing (1330) the audio output with the first tactile output, without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device. For example, in some embodiments, in the scenarios shown in Figures 6B1-6B8, 6B9-6B17, and 6B20-6B23, the device generates haptic audio outputs to accompany die tactile outputs that are generated in conjunction with displaying quick action menu 608 (Figure 6B4), preview 628 (Figure

6B13), preview 640 {Figure OB22), and user interface 644 (Figure 6B23) regardless of whether audio output is muted at the device.

J 00481] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface: in accordance with a. determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled and in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a predefined exempted operation (e.g,, a peek and pop operations, or quick action menu presentation on the home screen that are triggered based on Intensity-dependent input criteria), the device provides {1332) the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators. Forexample, in some embodiments, in the scenarios shown in Figures 6B1-6BS, 6B9-6B1 7, and 6B20-6B23, the device generates tactile outputs in conjunction with displaying quick action menu 608 (Figure 6B4), preview 628 (Figure 6B13), preview 640 (Figure 6B22), and user interface 644 (Figure 6B23) even when user interface tactile outputs are disabled at the device, because displaying the quick action menus and previews and content user interlace in response to a force press (e.g., a press input with contact intensity above the light press intensity threshold ITl or deep press intensity threshold Hfo are exempted from control by the user Interface tactile output setting).

100482] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, the device determines whether the first operation Is a first type of predefined operation and/or a second type of predefined operation. In accordance with a

160

DK 2016 70738 A1 deiernrination. that, ihe first operation is the first type of predefined operation (e.g., a peek and pop operations, or quick action menu presentation on the home screen that are triggered based on intensity-dependent input criteria), the device provides (1334) the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators.

In accordance with a determination that the first operation is the second type of predefined operation (e.g., moving focus between different options in a quick action menu displayed in response to an increase in Intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a respective intensity threshold, or indicating the satisfaction of triggering criteria for triggering an operation associated with a content preview that was displayed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a respective intensity threshold), the device perforins the first operation and without providing tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators. For example, in Figures 6B2-6B8, tactile output is provided in conjunction with displaying quick action menu 608 in response to a press input by contact 605, and tactile outputs are skipped in conjunction with moving through each menu option in the quick action menu in response to a swipe input by contact 605. In accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled, (e.g., fhe haptics toggle setting for the electronic device is on) the device performs the first operation and provides the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators, without regard to whether the first operation is of the first type of predefi ned operation or {he second type of predefined operation. For example, in Figures 6Λ2-6Α8, tactile output is provided in conjunction with displaying quick action menu 608 in response to a press input by contact 605, and tactile outputs are also generated in conjunction with moving through each menu option in the quick action menu in response to a swipe input by contact. 605, |00483| It should be understood that the particular order in which tire operations in Figures 13A-I3D have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 900. 1100, 1500, 1700, and 1900) are also applicable m an analogous manner to method 1300 described above with

161

DK 2016 70738 A1 respect to Figures 13A-13D. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, haptic audio outputs, intensity thresholds, tinting criteria, locus selector, animations, and configurations described above with reference to methods 700,900,1100, 1500, 1700, and 1900 optionally have one or tnore ofthe characteristics ofthe contacts, gestures, user interlace objects, tactile outputs, haptic audio outputs, intensity thresholds, tinting criteria, focus selector, animations, and configurations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 1300). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

|G0484| In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 14 show's a ftmctional block diagram of an electronic device 1.4ÖÖ con figured in accordance with the principles ofthe various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of tlte various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 14 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation, or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

|004S5| As shown in Figure 14, the electronic device 1400, includes a display unit 1401 configured to display information (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display). Figure 1A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 (e.g., display controller 1.56 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure I A) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, optionally one or more sensor units 1406 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit and/or a respective button ofthe device (e.g.. a home button), one or more tactile output generating units 1407 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing mist 1408 coupled with the display mitt 1402, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1404, the optional one or more sensor units 1406, and the one or more tacti le output generating units 1407. For ease of illustration, Figure .14 shows display unit 1402 and touchsensitive surface unit 1404 as integrated with electronic device 1400, however, in some embodiments one or both of these units are in communication with the electronic device, although the units remain physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3). in some embodiments, tlie processing unit includes a

162

DK 2016 70738 A1 displaying unit (e.g., displaying unit 14IO), an input detecting unit {e.g., input detecting unit 1412), an operation performing unit (e.g,, operation performing unit 1414), a tactile output providing unit (e.g., tactile output providing unit 1416), an audio output providing unit (e.g,, audio output providing unit 1418).

[00486] In some -embodiments, the processing unit (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 1410-1418) is configured to: display, on the display, a first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1410), and a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button; while displaying the first user interface, detect a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface (e.g., with the input detecting unit 1412); in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface; in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, perform a first operation (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1414) and provide via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 1416); in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, perform the first operation (e.g., with the operation performing unit. 1414), and forgo providing at least a portion of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation; alter performing the first operation, detect a second input of the first type on the home button; and in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button; perform a second operation that is associated with the home button (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1414); and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 1416), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

[00487] In some embodiments, the first user interface is a user interface of a first application, tire first operation is an operation of the first application, and the second operation includes dismissing the first application.

[00488] in some embodiments, tire processing unit is configured to; after performing the first operation, detect a first input of a second type, distinct from the first type, on the home button (e.g., with the input detecting unit 1412); and in response to detecting the first

163

DK 2016 70738 A1 input of the second type on the home button; perform a third operation, distinct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button {e.g., with the operation performing unit 1414); and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button (e.g,, with the tactile output providing unit 1416), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device.

[00489] In some embodiments, the processing unit, is configured to: after performing the first operation, detect a first input of a third type, distinct .from the first type, on the home button (e.g,, with the input detecting unit 1412); and in response to detecting the first input of the third type on the home button; perform a fourth operation, distinct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button {e.g,, with the operation performing unit 14I4y and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of die Ito me button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 1416).

[00490) in some embodiments, the first tacti Se output and the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button are provided by the same one or more actuators of the one or snore tactile output generators.

[004911 In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern of a corresponding tactile output that is provided in response to a respective input of the first type on the home button is user-adjustable.

[0Ö492] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured fo; in response to detecting the second input of tbe first type on the home button, provide an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button (e.g,, with the audio output providing unit .1418), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, and without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the devlee.

[00493) In some embodiments, the processing unit Is configured to; in response to detecting the second input of tbe first type on the home button, provide an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1418), without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs

164

DK 2016 70738 A1 are enabled, wherein a volume of the audio output is independent of a curr ent volume sett in tt al the device.

)00494] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type directed to Ihe first user interface: m accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled: In accordance with a determination that audio outputs are not muted at the device, provide an audio output with the first tactile output (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1418); and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are muted at the device, forgo providing the audio output with the first tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting tire first input of the first type directed to the first user interface; in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled; in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a first level at the device, provide an audio output with the first tactile output at a first volume that Is determined based on the first level ofthe audio outputs at the device (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1418); and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a second level at the device, provide the audio output with tire firsf tactile output at a second volume that is different from the first volume and is determined based on the second level ofthe audio outputs at the device (e.g., with the audio output providing unit 1418).

)00496} In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, forgo providing the audio output with the first tactile output, without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device.

)00497] in some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to defecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface: In accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled and in accordance with a determination that the first operation ts a predefined exempted operation, provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators.

165

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00498] In. some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: tn response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled: in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a first type of predefined operation, provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., with the tacti le output providing unit 1416); and in accordance with a detennination that the first operation is a second type of predefined operation, perform the first operation and without providing tactile output diat corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators (e.g,, with the operation performing unit 1414); and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled, perform the first operation (e.g., with the operation .performing unit 1414) and provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 1416), without regard to whether the first operation is of the first type of predefined operation or the second type of predefined operation.

(00499] Tl ae operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1 A. and 3) or application-specific chips.

(00500] The operations described above with reference to Figures 13A-13D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-I B or Figure 14, For example, displaying operation 1302, detection operation 1304, responding operation 1306, detection operation 1308, and responding operation 1310 arc, optionaliy, implemented by event, sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of tlie device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event

166

DK 2016 70738 A1 handler 1.90 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 1.77 io update the application internal state i 92. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by die application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00501 j Figures 15A-15E are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1500 of generating tactile outputs with different, tactile output patterns depending on an input-based metric or a user interface-based metric in accordance with some embodiments, 'fhe method 1500 is performed at an electronic device (e.g,, device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure I A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a virtual or physical home button) In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from tire touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, in some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device (e.g., a physical home button or a virtual home button). In some embodiments, the method 1500 is governed by instructions that are stored in a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readabl e storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure I A), For ease of explanation, the following describes method 1500 as performed by the device 100. Some operations in method 1500 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is. optionally, changed.

[00502] Method 1500 relates to generating tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns depending on an input-based metric or a user interface-based metric. The tactile output pattern of a tactile output (e.g., amplitude, waveform, and/or frequency) is selected based ou metrics such as a rate of change in intensity of a contact when crossing an intensity threshold, a speed of movement of a focus selector or user interface element, when the focus selector or user interface element crosses a threshold position in a user interface, etc. By tying the tactile output pattern of a tactile output more closely to the characteristics of the user input and/or tire visual changes in the user interface (as measured by the input-based

167

DK 2016 70738 A1 and/or user interface-based metrics), the feedback provided by the device becomes more intuitive and eon forms better to user expectation. The improved feedback to the user enhances the operabi lity of tire device (e.g., by conforming to user expectation and avoiding user confusion when interacting with the device) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating.· interacting with ihe device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

With reference to Figure 15A, the device displays (1502) a user interface on the display te.g , user interlace 524, Figure 5B62). While displaying the user interface, the device detects (1504} an input sequence te.g., a press input or a press and hold input, or a press input followed hy a release input) on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, and detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button (e,g., as shown in Figures 5B62-5B63).

[00504] in response to detecting the first press input on the home button (1506): in accordance with a. determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., Π'ι., Figure 5B6.3), and that a change in the characteristic Intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold (e.g. , an amount of change in the characteristic intensity of the contact that has occ urred during a predetermined time window' starting from, or ending at, or including the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold) has a first value for an intensity-change metric (e. g., as show n, in Figure 5B63), the device: performs a first operation that changes fhe user interface displayed on fhe display (e.g., changes user interface 524 in Figure 5B63 to user interface 522 in Figure 5B70); and generates, via tlie one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., tactile output 590 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5), Figure 5B63),

168

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00505j In response ίο detecting the first press input on the home button (1506): in accordance with a determination that the fust press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g,, Π),, Figure 5B67), and that die change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric (e.g., as shown tn Figure 5 B67), different from the first value of the intensity-change metric (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B63), the device performs the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display (e.g,, changes user interface 524 in Figure 5B67 to user interface 522 in Figure 5B70)and generates, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the Increase In the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g,, tactile output 592 (e.g,, MiniT'ap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figura 5B67) and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

[005(16] Turning now to Figure 15B, in some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have (1508) a same waveform (e.g., MiaiTap 230Hz, MiniTap 270Hz, or Mini Tap 300Hz) te.g., tactile output 590 in Figure 5B63 is a MiniTap 270 Hz and tactile output 592 in Figure 5B67 is a MiniTap 270Hz) and the first discrete tactile output and die second discrete tactile output have different amplitudes (e.g,, MiniTap 270Hz with a gain of 0.5 for the first discrete tactile output, as shown in Figure 5B63, and Mini Tap 270Hz with a gain of 1 for the second discrete tacti le output, as shown in Figure 5B67).

(00507] in some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output stops while the characteristic intensiiy of the contact is maintained above the first intensity threshold (1510) (e.g,, the first, discrete tactile output is a short “tap” such as a FullTap, MiniTap, or MicroTap rather than a sustained vibration) (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B63~5B64).

[00508] in some embodiments, the second tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of the contact is maintained above the first intensiiy threshold (1512) (e.g., the second discrete tactile output is a short “tap” such as a FullTap, MiniTap, or MicroTap rather than a sustained vibration) (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B67-5B6S).

[00509] in some embodiments, the first tactile output is generated (1514) for a first range of values of the intensity-change metric (e.g,, for an intensity-change metric value

169

DK 2016 70738 A1 range up io a predefined number of units of intensity per second ie.g., 1250 grams per second), sometimes referred to as a “soft” intensity, a tactile output with a first tactile output pattern is generated (e.g., Mini Tap 270Fiz with a gain of ¢).5, as shown in Figure 5B63)). hi some embodiments, the second tactile output is generated (1516) for a second range of values of the intensity-change metric {e.g., for an intensity-change metric value range greater than the predefined number of units of intensity per second (e.g., 1250 grams per second), sometimes referred to as a “normal” intensity, a tactile output with a second tactile output pattern (e.g., MiniTap 270Hz with a gain of 1.0, as shown in Figure 5B67), distinct from the first tactile output pattern (e.g., MiniTap 270Hz with a gain of 0.5, as shown in Figure 5B63), is generated).

(005101 \ Vith reference now to Figure S 5C, in some embodiments, detecting the input sequence on the home button further includes (1518) detecting a first release input on the home button, following the first press input on the home button, and detecting the first release input includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B65 and 5B69). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first release input on the home button {1518); in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below a second intensity threshold (e.g., a release Intensity threshold that is the same or different front the press intensity threshold (e.g., the release intensity threshold ITlr is lower than the press intensity threshold TTc)), and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has a third value for the intensity-change metric (e.g.. for an intensity-change metric value range up to a predefined number of units of intensity per second (e.g., 1250 grams per second)), the device generates, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold (e.g., tactile output 591 (e.g.. MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.25), Figure 5B65).

(00511 j In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first release input on the home button (1518); in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensif y threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has

170

DK 2016 70738 A1 a fourth value for the intensity-change metric, different from the third valne of the intensitychange metric (e,<£.. foran intensity-change metric value range greater than a predefined number of units of intensity per second (e.g., 1250 grams per second)), the device generates, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fourth discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold (e.g., tactile output 593 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5), Figure 5B69)and is different front the third discrete tactile output (e.g., tactile output 591 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.25), Figure 5B65).

100512] In some embodiments, generating the first and second tactile outputs includes (1520) applying a first modification (e.g.. change the amplitude by a first multiplier or gain value) to a base tactile output pattern in accordance with the first and second values of the Intensity-change metric, respectively and generating the third and fourth tactile outputs includes applying a second modification (e.g., change the amplitude by a second multiplier or gain value), distinct from the first modification, to the base tactile output pattern in accordance with the third and fourth values of the intensity-change metr ic, respectively.

[00513] In some embodiments, the second intensity threshold is (1522) different from (e.g., lower than) the first intensity threshold (e.g., the down-click intensity threshold is 350mg and the up-elick intensity threshold is 250mg.). In some embodiments, the downclick and the up-ctick intensity' thresholds are dynamically determined based on characteristics of the press input and/or release input. For example, in some embodiments, a press input with a faster increase in intensity (e.g., a fast and hard press) may lead to a higher down-click intensity threshold than a press input with a slower increase in intensity (e.g,, a slower and more gentle press). Similarly, a release input with a slower decrease in intensity (e.g,, a slower and gentler release) may lead to a lower up-cliek intensity threshold than a release input with a faster decrease in intensity (e.g., a quick release).

[00514] Turning now to Figure 15D, in some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output are generated (1524) from a base haptic output pattern (e.g., different amount of modifications are applied to the base haptic output pattern (e.g., amplitude modulation, frequency modulation, delay, etc.) in accordance with the values of the intensity-change metric) that is associated with a currently selected tactile

DK 2016 70738 A1 output setting from a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button (e g.. MiniTap 230Hz, MiniTap 270Hz, or MiniTap 300Hz). An example of changing tactile output settings for a home button is described above with reference to method 1100 and with respect to Figures 50-50 .9, [00515] In some embodiments, the home button is persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on tbe device that is separate from tbe display (1526) (e.g., button 204, Figure 5B52). in some embodiments, the intensity-change metric is based (1528) on a rate of change of the characterist ic intensity of the contact over time (e.g., a rate of change over a time window of 50ms).

[00516] In some embodiments, the intensity-change metric is based on (1530) a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact measured at a time that the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a relevant threshold intensity (e.g,, the first intensity threshold, the second intensity threshold, etc.) (e.g., when reaching 11)., as shown in Figures 5B63 and 5B67, or when reaching Π),κ> as shown in Figure 5B65 and 5B69).

[00517] In some embodiments, detecting the input sequence Includes (1532) detecting a second press input on the home button (e. g., following tbe initial press input and a release of the initial press input), and detecting ihe second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button. In response to detecting die second press Input (1532); in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input (e.g., a time at which the intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold for the first time or a time at which the intensity of the contact, decreases below a release intensity threshold that corresponds to the first intensity threshold for the first time) and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input (e.g., a time at which the intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold for the second time or a time at which the intensity of the contact decreases below the release intensity threshold for the second time), that the first press input and the second press input are part of a predefined input pattern (e.g., because the second point in time is less than a threshold amount of time alter the first point in time (e.g., the duration between tire first down-click and the second down-click is less than the time window for detecting a double dick input or the duration between the first up-elick and the second up-elick is less than the time window for detecting .172

DK 2016 70738 A1 a double dick input, or the duration between the first up-click io the second down-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click input)), the device performs a second operation associated with the predefined input pattern (e.g., a double click input pattern) (e.g,, displaying a multi-tasking user interlace, as shown in Figures SB5-5BI4), and the second operation is different horn the first operation; and the device provides, via the one or more tactile output, generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, distinct front the first and second tactile outputs (e.g., tactile output 573 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of Ö.8), Figure 5810).

j 00518] For example, in some embodiments, the tactile output for the second click of a double click input is different from the tactile output for a single click input or the tactile output for a first click of the double click input (e.g., in Figures 5B5-5B10, the second press input of the double click input (e.g., tactile output 573, Figure 5B10) has a different tactile output than tlie first press input of the double click input fe.g., tactile output 571, Figure 5B6)). In some embodiments, the tactile output tor the second click of the double click input (e.g., tactile output 573 (e.g., MiaiTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8), Figure SB 10) has a lower amplitude than does the fust click of the double click input (e.g., tactile output 571 (e.g.. MsniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B6F In some embodiments, the tactile output for the down-cl ick of the first click of tlie double click input has a higher amplitude than the upclick of the first click, and has a higher amplitude than the down-click of the second click of the double click input (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B6, 5B8, and 5B10, respectively). In some embodiments, the up-click of the second click of the double click input is the same as the up-click of the first click of the double click mput (e.g., the up-click is not modified). In some embodiments, the up-click of the second click of the double click input is modified in the same way as the down-click of the second click of the double click input.

[00519] With reference now to Figure 15E, in some embodiments, detecting the input sequence includes (1534) detecting a second press input on the home button (e.g., following the initial press input and a release of the initial press input), and detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button (e.g., from an intensity below the first intensity threshold to an intensity above the first intensity threshold), in response to detecting the first press input, the device provides (1534) a first audio output concurrently with a respective one of the first and

173

DK 2016 70738 A1 second tactile outputs that was generated in response to the first press input (e.g., as shown in Figure 40).

('00520} In response to detecting the second press input: in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input (e.g., a time at which the intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold for the first time or a time at which the intensity of the contact decreases below a second intensity threshold after increasing above the first intensity threshold for the first time) and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input (e.g., a time at which the intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold for the second time or a rime at which fhe intensity of the contact decreases below a second intensity threshold after increasing above the first intensity threshold for the second time), that the first press input and the second press input are part of a predefined : pattern (e.g., because the second point in time is less titan a threshold amount of time •e first point in time (e.g., the duration between the first down-click and the second down-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click input; or the duration between the first up-click and ihe second up-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click input, or the duration between fhe first up-click to the second down-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click input)), the device: (i) performs a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; (ii) provides, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, the fifth tactile output being identical to the respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that was generated for the first press input; and (iii) provides a second audio output concurrently with the fifth discrete tactile output, and the second audio output and the first audio output have different audio output patterns (e.g., different amplitudes, frequencies, and/or waveforms) (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5B5-5B14 and in tire third row of Figure 4K).

|005211 In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first press input on the home button (1536), the device changes the user interfiles from a first user interlace to a second user interface, without regard to the value of the intensity-change metric that corresponds to the first press input (e.g., user interface 522, Figure 5B7Ö, is displayed ® the sequence of Figure 5B52-5B65 and also after the sequence of Fi gure 5B66-5B69). In some embodiments, the change from the first user interface to the second user Interface is

174

DK 2016 70738 A1 displayed with the same animation, in some embodiments, the change from the fir st user interface to the second user interface is displayed with a different animation drat is dependent upon tlte value of the intensity-change metric (e.g., a quicker transition for a faster press input and a slower transition for a slower press input).

(00522] h should be understood drat the particular order in which the operations in Figures 15A- i 5E have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be perforated. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein te.g., methods 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1700, and 1900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method S 500 described above with respect to Figures 15 A-15E. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 1500 optionally have one or more of the characterist ics o f the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tac tile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, tinte thresholds- focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e g., methods 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1700, and 1900), For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

(00523] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 16 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1600 configured in accordance with the principles oft.be various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments, it is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 16 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement fhe principles of fhe various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

(00524] As shown in Figure 16, the electronic device 1600, Includes a. display unit

1601 configured to display informal ton (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 {also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display), Figure Ϊ A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 1604 (e.g., display controller 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1A)

175

DK 2016 70738 A1 configured ίο receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, one or more sensor units 1606 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touchsensitive surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), one or more tactile output generating units 1607 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1608 coupled with the display unit 1602, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1604, the one or more sensor units 1606, and the one or snore tactile output generating units 1607. For ease of illustration, Figure 16 shows display unit 1602 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1604 as integrated with electronic device 1600, however, in some embodiments one or both of these units are in communication with the electronic device, although the units remain physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3). in some embodiments, the processing unit includes a displaying unit (e.g., displaying unit 161()), an input detecting unit {e.g,, input detecting unit 1612), a characteristic intensity detecting unit (e.g., characteristic intensity detecting unit 1614), an operation performing unit (e.g., operation performing unit 1616), a tactile output generating unit (e.g. , tactile output generating unit 1618), a determining unit (e.g., determining unit 1620), and an audio output providing unit (e.g.. audio output providing unit 1622).

[ÖÖ525] in some embodiments, the processing unit, (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 1610-1622) is configured to; display a user interface on die display (e.g., with fhe displaying unit 1610); while displaying the user interface, detect an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button (e.g,, with the input detecting unit 1612), and detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button; and in response to detecting the first press input on the home button; in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., using die determining unit 1620), and that a change in die characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when die characteristic intensity ofthe contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric {e.g , with the characteristic intensity detecting unit 1614); perform a first operation that changes die user interface displayed, on the display (e.g,, with the operation performing unit .1616); and generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a. first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact above the first intensity threshold (eg., with the taetde

176

DK 2016 70738 A1 output generating unit 1618); and in accordance with a determination (eg.. using the determining unit 1620) that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., with the characteristic intensity detecting unit 1614), and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate io the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of the intensity-change metric (e.g., with the characteristic intensity detecting unit 1614): perform the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1616); and generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output (e.g., with the tactile output generating unit 1618).

In some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have a same waveform; and the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have different amplitudes.

[00527) In some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of the contact is maintained above the first intensity threshold.

[00528) In some embodiments, the second tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of the contact is maintained above the first intensity threshold.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output is generated for a first range of values of the intensity-change metric.

)00530) in some embodiments, the second tactile output is generated lor a second range of values of the intensity-change metric.

In some embodiments, detecting the input sequence on the home button further includes detecting a first release input on the home button, following the first press input on the home button, and detecting the first release input includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button; and the processing unit is configured to; in response to detecting the first release input on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the

DK 2016 70738 A1 characteristic intensity of the contact below a second intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has a third value for the intensity-change metric: generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold fe.g., with the tactile output, generating unit 1618); and in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensify of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has a fourth value for the intensity-change metric, different from the third value of the intensit ychange metric: generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fourth discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold and is different from the third discrete tactile output (e.g., with the tactile output generating unit 1618), (110532( In some embodiments, generating the first and second tactile outputs includes applying a first modification to a base tactile output pattern ttt accordance with the first and second values of the intensity-change metric, respectively; and generating the third and fourth tactile outputs includes applying a second modification, distinct from the first modification, to the base tactile output pattern in accordance with the third and fourth values of the intensity-change metric, respectively.

(00533( in some embodiments, the second intensity threshold is different from the first intensity threshold.

(00534( In some embodiments, the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output are generated from a base haptic output pattern that is associated with a currently selected tactile output setting from a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button.

(00535( ht some embodiments, the home button is persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display.

178

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00536) In some embodiments, the intensity-change metric is based on a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact over time.

[00537] In some embodiments, the intensity-change metric is based on a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact measured at a time that the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a relevant threshold intensity.

[00538] In some embodiments, detecting the input sequence includes detecting a second press input on the home button, wherein detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button; and the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the second press input; in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input ate part of a predefined input pattern: performing a second operation associated wi th the predefined Input pattern (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1616), the second operation being different from the first operation; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, distinct from the first and second tactile outputs (e.g,, with the tactile output generating unit 1618).

)00539) In some embodiments, detecting the input sequence includes detecting a second press input on the home button, wherein detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button; and the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first press input, providing a first audio output concurrently with a respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that was generated in response to the first press input (e.g. , with the audio output providing unit 1622); and in response to detecting the second press input; in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time bet ween a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the fust press input and the second press input are part of a predefined Input pattern: performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation (e.g.. with the operation performing unit 1616); providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, w herein the fifth tactile output is ident ical to the respective one of the

179

DK 2016 70738 A1 •first and second tactile outputs that was generated for the first press input (e.g., with ihe tactile output generating unit 1618); and providing a second audio output concurrently with the fifth discrete tactile output (e.g., with the audio output providing unit ί 622), the second output and the first audio output having different audio output patterns.

)00540] In some -embodiments, the processing unit is configured to. in response to detecting the first press input on the home button: change the user interface from a first user interface to a second user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1610), without regard to the value of the intensity-change metric that corresponds to the first press input.

100541] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules In information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g,, as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application-specific chips.

)00542] The operations described above with reference to Figures 15A-15E are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-IB or Figure 16. For example, displaying operation 1502, detection operation 1504, and responding operation 1506 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer .180, and event handler 190, Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1, A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event

?.r sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater .176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192, in some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, if would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in

Figures 1A-18.

180

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00543] Figures 17A.-17D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1700 of providing a different tactile output for a second click of a double click input than for the first click of the double click input in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1700 is perforated at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure I A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button ofthe device (e.g., a physical home button or a virtual home button). In some embodiments, the method 1700 is governed by instructions that are stored in a computer-readable storage medium (e.g,, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, such as the one or more processors 122 of device 100 (Figure 1 A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 1700 as performed by the device 100, Some operations in method .1700 are. optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00544] Method 1700 relates to providing a different tactile output for a second click of a double click input than for the first click of the double click input. By providing different tactile outputs for the two clicks of a double click input, the device effectively and succinctly signals to the user, after detecting two consecutive press inputs provided by the user, whether a double click is registered by the device or two separate single clicks are registered by the device. The improved feedback to the user enhances the operability ofthe device (e.g., by providing clues to the user regarding how the current input is recognized by the device (e.g,, as two single clicks or a double click) to avoid user confusion when seeing the device’s response to the input) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operatmg/interactiug with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently,

100545] With reference to Figure 17A, the device displays (1702) a first user interface (e.g., user interface 524, Figure 5B5) (e.g,, a user interface for an application that

18i

DK 2016 70738 A1 includes a plurality of activatable user interface objects). While displaying the first user interlace, the device detects (1704); (i) a first press input on the home button (e.g,, a downclick event that corresponds to an increase in intensity of the contact above a press intensity threshold followed by an up-click event that corresponds to a decrease in intensity of the contact below a release intensity threshold that is, optionally, lower than the press intensity threshold) (e.g,, as shown in Figures 586-5B8 and in Figures 5B40-5B42) and (ii) a second press input on the home button {.e.g.. a down-click event that corresponds to an increase in intensity of the contact above the press intensity threshold optionally followed by an upclick event that corresponds to a decrease in intensity of the contact below the release intensity threshold that is, optionally, lower than the press intensity threshold) that is detected after the first press input (e.g., as shown in Figure 5810 and in Figure 5845), [00546] In response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, the device provides (1706) a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile (e.g,, the first non-visual output profile includes tactile output pattern(s) for one or more discrete tactile outputs, and optionally, corresponding audio output patterns for one or more audio outputs that are to accompany the one or more tactile outputs). The first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., tactile output 571 (e.g., MiniTap 270 .Hz with a gain of I), Figure 5B6, and tactile output 582 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B40) [00547] In response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input, and the second press input on the home button (1708), the device determines, based at least in part on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input (e.g., a time at which the down-click event for the first press input was detected or a time at which the up-click event for the first press input was detected) and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input (e.g., a time at which the down-click event for the second press input was detected or a time at which the up-click event for the second press input was detected), whether the first and second press inputs are separate inputs or are part of an input pattern. In accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs (e.g., in Figures 5B39-5B48), the device (ί) performs a first

182

DK 2016 70738 A1 operation associated with the first press input (e.g., the first operation includes ceasing to display the first user interface (e.g.. user interface 524. Figure 5B39) and displaying a second user interface on the display (e.g., user interface 522, Figure 5B46) (e.g., an expanded fo lder overlaid on a darkened home screen, a home screen, a primary' page of a multi-page home screen, etc }}: and {iii provides a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile (e.g,, tactile output 584 fe.g., Mini Tap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B45), wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators. For example, because the second point in time is greater than a threshold amount of time after the first point in time {e.g., the duration between the first down-click and the second down-click is greater than the time window for detecting a double click input; or the duration between the first up-click and the second up-click is greater than the time window for detecting a double click input, or the duration between the first up-click to the second down-click is greater than the time window for detecting a double click input), the device determines that fhe first and second press inputs are separate inputs (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B39-5B48), In some embodiments, the threshold amount of time for detecting a double click input is dynamically determined in accordance wi th the rate of intensity-change proximate to the time when the down-click event of the first click is detected. For example, a faster approach to the down-click intensity threshold leads to a shorter time window for detecting a double click input, and hence, faster confirmation of a single click input which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper Inputs and reducing user mistakes when operatingfinteracting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of fhe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

|00548| In accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part of a (predefined} input pattern (e.g , in Figures 5B5-5B14), the device: Ci.) performs a second operation associated with the input pattern, and the second operation is different from the first operation (e.g., the second operation includes ceasing to display the first user interface (e.g., user interface 524, Figure 5B5) and displaying a third user interface on the display (e g., a multitasking user interface that concurrently presents multiple user

183

DK 2016 70738 A1 interfeces, such as user interface 528, Figure 5B 14 )|, and (ii) provides a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile (e.g,, tactile output 573 (e.g.. MiniTap 270

Hz with a gain of 0.8), Figure 5BI0) (e.g., the second non-visual output profile includes tactile output pattern) s) for one or more discrete tactile outputs, and optionally, corresponding audio output patterns tor one or more audio outputs that are to accompany the one or more tactile outputs) that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, and the third non-visual output provides .feedback indicating that the second press input was detected (and is different from the second non-visual output to indicate that the second press input was part of a predefined input pattern) and the third non-visual output includes tactile output prov ided by the one or more tactile output generators. For example, because the second point in time is less than a threshold amount of time after the first point in time (e.g., the duration between the first down-click and the second down-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click input; or the duration between the first up-click and the second up-click is less than the time window for detecting a double click Input, or the duration between the first up-click to the second down-click is less than tire time window for detecting a double click input)), the device determines that the first and second press inputs are part of the input pattern (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B5-5B14). In some embodiments, the threshold amount of time for detecting a double click input is dynamically determined in accordance with the rate of intensity-change proximate to the time when the down-click event of the first click is detected. For example, a faster approach to the down-click intensity threshold leads io a shorter time window for deteetinn a double v 'η·' click input, and hence, faster confirmation of a single click input which enhances the operability ofthe device and makes the user-device interface more efficient te.g.. by the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operaiing/mteraeting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

[00549] With reference now to Figure i 7B„ in some embodiments, the first point in time is one of (1710): a time at which a characteristic intensity ofthe first press input increased above a press intensity threshold (e.g., ITj.) (e.g., as shown hi Figure 5B6 and Figure 5B40), and a time at which the characteristic intensity of the first press input decreased below a release intensity threshold (e.g.. IT: B (e.g.. as shown in Figure 5B8 and Figure 5B42). in some embodiments, the second point in time is one of (1712): a time at

184

DK 2016 70738 A1 which a characteristic intensity of the second press input increased above a press intensitythreshold (e.g., IT}.) (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B10 and Figure 5B45}, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of the second press input decreased below a release intensity threshold (e.g., Γ1)..«).

(00550] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs (e.g., because the second point in time is greater than a threshold amount of time after the first, point in time), the device (1714): performs a third operation associated with die second press input (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B39-5B48). in some embodiments, the third operation is different from the first operation associated with the first press input. In some embodiments, the third operation is different from the second operation associated with the input pattern. In some embodiments, die third operation includes ceasing to display the second user interface (e.g., an expanded folder overlaid on a darkened home screen, such as user interface 522, Figure 5B47) and displaying a fourth user interface on the display (e.g., a home screen, such as user interface 520, Figure 51348), In some embodiments, if after performing the first operation associated with the first press input, a home screen is already displayed, the third operation has no effect.

[.00551J hi some embodiments, performing the first operation associated with the first press input includes (1716) performing the first operation in response to a release event t or up-click event) of the first press input (e.g., corresponding to a decrease In intensity of the contact, below a release intensity threshold).

(00552] In some embodiments, the tactile output of the third non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 573 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8), Figure 51310) is ( .1718) different from the tactile output of the first non-visual output (e.g.. tactile output 571 (e.g... MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of I), Figure 5B6).

in some embodiments, a first audio output of the first non-visual output is (1720) different from a second audio output of the third non-visual output (e.g., as shown in Figure 4K). In some embodiments, when the fir st audio output of the first non-visual output is different from the second audio output of tire third non-visual output, the tactile output of the first non-visual output is the same as the tactile output of the third non-visual output, in

185

DK 2016 70738 A1 some embodiments. when the first audio output of the first non-visual output is different from the second audio output of the third non-visual output, the tactile output of the first non-visual output is different from the tacti le output of the third non-visual output (e.g,, as shown in Figure 5B6, where tactile output 571 has a gain of 1, and in Figure 5B1Ö, where tactile output 57.3 has a gain of 0.8).

(00554] In some embodiments, the first press input on the home button is (1722} a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact, on the home button above a press intensify threshold followed by a first release event that, corresponds to a decrease in die characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold (that is. optionally. Sower than the press intensity threshold) (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B6-5B8), and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact t e.g., the same continuous contact as tlie first contact, or a distinct contact from the first contact) on the home button above the press intensity threshold (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B1Ö).

]0O555| Turning now to Figure .I 7C, the first press input on the home button is (1724) a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold (that is, optionally, lower than the press intensity threshold), and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact (e.g,, the same continuous contact as the first, contact, or a distinct contact from the first contact) on the home button above the press intensity threshold followed by a second release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the second contact below the release intensity threshold (that is, optionally, lower than the press intensity threshold).

in some embodiments, in response to detecting the first press input on the button (1726): in accordance with a detennination that, an intensity-change metric of the first press input has a first value (e.g., a change in the characteristic intensity of a contact in the first press input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact in the first press input increases above the press intensity threshold has a first value tor an intensity-change metric), the device provides the first non-visual output with a first

186

DK 2016 70738 A1 amplitude that corresponds to the first value for the intensity-change metric (e.g., tactile output 590 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5). Figure 5B63); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the first press input has a second value different from the first value (e.g., the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact In the first press input proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact in the first press input increases above the press intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric different from the first value of the intensity-change metric), providing the first non-visual output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for tire intensity-change metric (e.g,, tactile output 592 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B67), wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude. An example of selecting non-visual input based on an intensity-change metric is described above with reference to method 1500.

100557] in some embodiments, in response to detecting the second press input on the home button (1728): in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs: in accordance with a determination that an intensitychange metric of the second press input has a third value (e.g., that a change in a characteristic in tensity of a contact in the second press inpu t proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press Input increases above the press intensity threshold has a third value for the intensity-change metric), the device provides the second non-visual output with a third amplitude that corresponds io the third value for the .intensity-change metric· and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value (e.g., that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press input proximate to when the characteristic intensity of the contact in. the second press input increases above the press intensity threshold has a fourth value for the intensity-change metric) different from the third value, the device provides the second non-visual output with a fourth amplitude tliat corresponds to die fourth value for die intensity-change metric., the fourth amplitude being different from the third amplitude. For example, when die first press input and the second press inpnt are interpreted as separate press Inputs, the amplitudes of the tactile outputs tor the first and second press inputs are varied based on the rates of increase of the intensity of the press inputs at the times when the first intensity threshold is crossed by the first and second press inputs., and tire waveforms and frequencies of the tactile outputs are the same

187

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00558) Also, in response to detecting the second press input on the home button (I728); in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press : are part of the (predefined) input pattern; in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has the third value (e.g., that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press input increases above the press intensity threshold has the third value for the intensity-change metric), the device provides the third non-visuat output with a fifth amplitude that corresponds to the third value for the intensity change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value (e.g., that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact in the second press input increases above the press intensity threshold has the fourth value for the intensity-change metric), the device provides the third non-visuat output with a sixth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the sixth amplitude is different trom the fifth amplitude. An example of selecting non-visual input based on an intensity-change metric is described above with reference to method 1500. For example, when the first press input and the second press input are interpreted as part of a same input sequence such as a double click, the amplitude of the tac tile output for the second press input is varied based on the rate of increase of the intensity of the press input. Even though the amplitude of the non-visual output provided for each press input of two consecutive press inputs is selected based on the value of the intensity-change metric associated with the press input, the amplitude of the non-visual output for the second press input of two separate inputs is different from the amplitude of the non-visual output for the second press input of a predefined input pattern, even if the two press inputs have the same value for the intensity-change metric, which provides the user with feedback that is more consistent with the user’s inputs (e.g., harder presses produce different feedback than softer presses), which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interachng with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

188

DK 2016 70738 A1 (00559] With reference now to Figure 17D, in. some embodiments, in response to detecting the first press input, the first press input being consistent with a request to transition to a second user interface te.g., a single click input to transition to a home screen) and a request to transition to a third user interface (e.g., a. double click input to transition to a multitasking user interface), the device starts (1730) to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface (e.g., as shown in Figures 586-5BI O), in response to detecting the second press input, the second press Input being detected while the first animated transition is being displayed: in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a first time (e.g., a click that Is detected before a threshold amount of time for detecting a double click input has elapsed), the device: interrupts the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition (e.g., at user interface 525-5, Figure 5B10), and displays a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., the second animated transition including user interfaces 526-.1, 526-2, and 526-3, Figures 5B11-5B13) to the third user interface (e.g., user interface 528, Figure 5B.14).

(00560] Also, in response to detecting the second press input: in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a second time that is after the first time (e.g., a click that is detected before a threshold amount of time for detecting a double click input has elapsed), the device: interrupts the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition (e.g., at user interface 525-6, Figure 5B21) that Is after the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., at user interfece 525-5, Figure 5B1Ö), and displays a third animated transition from fhe second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface (e.g,, the third animated transition including user interfaces 527-1,527-2, and 527-3, Figures 5B22-5B24), wherein the third animated transition is different from die second animated transition. An example of interrupting an animation, based on when a second press snout is detected is described above with reference to method 9()0.

(00561] It should be understood that fhe particular order in which die operations in Figures 17A-17D have been described Is merely exemplary and Is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described

189

DK 2016 70738 A1 herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700. 900, 1100. i .iOO, 1500, and 1900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1700 described above with respect to Figures 17A-17D. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 1700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user Interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 900,1100,

1300, 1500, and 1900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

(00562] In accordance with some embodiments. Figure 18 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1800 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functionai blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to cany out the principles of the various described embodiments, ft is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 18 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of fhe functional blocks described herein, (00563] As shown in Figure 18, the electronic device 1800, includes a display unit 1801 configured to display information (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display), Figure 1 A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 1804 (e.g.. display eomrolier 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1 A) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, one or more sensor units 1806 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touchsensitive surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), one or more tactile output generating units 1807 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1.808 coupled with the display unit 1802, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1804, the one or more sensor units 1806, and the one or more tactile output generating units 1807. For ease of illustration. Figure 18 shows display unit 1802 and touch-sensitive surface unit 1804 as integrated with electronic device 1800, however, in some embodiments one or both of units are in communication with the electronic device, although die units remain

190

DK 2016 70738 A1 physically separate from the electronic device (e.g., as shown and explained in reference to Figure 3). in some embodiments, the processing unit includes a displaying unit (e.g., displaying unit 1810), an input detecting unit (e.g., input detecting unit 1812), a non-visual output providing unit (e.g., non-visual output providing unit 1814), a determining unit (e.g., determining unit 1816), and an operation performing unit (e.g., operation performing unit 1818).

[00564] In some embodiments, the processing unit, (or one or more components thereof, such as the units 1810-.1818) is configured to; display a first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1810); while displaying the first user interface, defect; a first press input on the home button (e.g., with the input detecting unit 18.12); and a second press input on the home button that is detected after the first press input (e.g., with the input detecting unit 1812); in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, provide a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile (e.g., with the non-visnal output providing unit 1814), the first non-visual output providing feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the fu st non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators, in response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button; in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs; perform a first operation associated with the first press input (e.g,, with the operation performing unit 1818); and provide a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile (e.g,, with the non-visual output providing unit 1814), the second non-visual output providing feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by tire one or more tactile output generators ; and, in accordance wit h a determination, based on the amount of time between th.e first point in time and the second point in time, that th.e first press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern: perform a second operation associated with the input pattern (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1818), the second operation being different from the first operation; and provide a third non-visual output with a second nonvisual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit .1814)., the third non-visual output providing feedback

191

DK 2016 70738 A1 indicating thai the second press input was detected and the third nontactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

isual ouiptii includes [00565] in some embodiments, tbe first point in time is one of: a time at which a characteristic intensity of the first press input increased above a press intensity threshold, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of tbe first press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

[00566] in some embodiments, the second point in time is one of: a time at which a characteristic imensity of the second press input increased above a press intensity threshold, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of the second press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

[00567] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: m response to detecting the input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on tire home button: in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs: perform a third operation associated with the second press input (e.g., with the operation performing unit 1818).

[00568] In some embodiments, performing the first operation associated with the first press input includes performing the first operation in response to a release event of the first press input.

[00569] in some embodiments., the tactile- output of the third non-visual output is different from the tactile output of the first non-visual output.

[00570] In some embodmients, a first audio output of the first non-visual output is di fferent from a second audio output of the third non-visual output.

[0057ϊ ] In some embodiments, the first press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity ofa first contact, on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in die characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on tbe home button above the press intensity threshold.

192

DK 2016 70738 A1 (005721 In some embodiments, the first press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that eorresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the home button above the press intensity threshold followed by a second release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the second contact below the release intensify threshold.

(00573( In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first press input on the home button: in accordance with a determination that an intensity-change metric of the first press input has a first value, provide the first nonvisual output with a first amplitude that eorresponds to the first value for ihe intensitychange metric (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the first press input has a second value different from the first value, provide the first non-visual output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814).

(00574( In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the second press input on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs: in accordance with a determination that an intensity-change metric of the second press input has a third value, provide the second non-visual output with a third amplitude that corresponds to the third value for the intensity-change metric (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value different from the third value, provide the second non-visual output with a fourth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the fourth amplitude is different front the third amplitude (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814); and in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are part of the input pattern: in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has the third value.

193

DK 2016 70738 A1 provide the third non-visual output with a fifth amplitude that corresponds to the third value for the intensity change metric (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814); and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value, provide the third non-visual output with a sixth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, the sixth amplitude being different from the fifth amplitude (e.g., with the non-visual output providing unit 1814), [00575] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first press input, the first, press input being consistent with a request to transition to a second user interface and a request to transition to a third user interface, start to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 1810); In response to detecting the second press input, the second press input being detected while the first animated transition is being displayed: in accordance wiih a determination tlrat ihe second press input is received at a first time; interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to tire second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1810), and display a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface {e.g., with the displaying unit 1810); and in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a second time that is after the first time: interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1810), and display a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition (e.g., with the displaying unit 1810).

[00576] The operations in the information processing methods described above are.

optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g,, as described above with respect to Figures 1Ä and 3) or application-specific chips.

[00577] 'The operations described above with reference to f igures 17A-17D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-iB or figure. IS. For example, displaying operation 1702, defection operation 1704, responding operation 1706,

194

DK 2016 70738 A1 and responding operation i 708 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170. event recognizer 180, and event handler 190, Event monitor 171 in event, sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers fhe event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of appl ication 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at. a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation ofthe device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection, of an object on a user interface, or rotation of fhe device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with fhe detection ofthe event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler .190 accesses a respective GUI updater .178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[()0578] Figures 19A-19C are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1900 of providing discrete tactile outputs to indicate activation of a persistent non-mechanical button on a device in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable rauhifonction device 100, Figure 1 A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touchscreen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with fhe display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button ofthe device (e.g., a home button such as a processors of the electronic device, such as fhe one or more processors .122 of device 100 (Figure f A). For ease of explanation, the following describes method 1900 as performed by physical, home button or a virtual home button). In some embodiments, the method 1900 is governed by instructions that are stored in a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a nontransitory computer readable storage medium) and that are executed by one or more

195

DK 2016 70738 A1 the device i00. Some operations in method 1900 are. optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

Method 1900 relates to specific designs of discrete tactile outputs that are provided to indicate activation ofa persistent non-mechanical button on a device. The waveforms (e.g., number of oscillations made by an actuator across a neutral position) and frequency ranges of the tactile outputs together produce natural and succinct feedback to indicate that the button has been activated by a press input, and at the same time, without undue distractions to the user by unnecessarily prolonging the tactile outputs with continued oscillations of the actuator(s), which enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Additionally, the carefully selected tactile output patterns improve the efficiency of the feedbac k provided to the user and thus improve the battery li fe of the device.

[00580] With reference to Figure 19A, the device detects ( 1902) an input on the respective button (e.g., button 204, Figure 5Ä1), and the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place ofa mechanical switch that detects activation of the respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed, in response to detecting the input on the respective button (1904): in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria (e.g., in Figures 5A9-5Al. 1), wherein the activation criteria, include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold (e.g,, a light press intensity threshold ITt) in order for the activation criteria to be met, the device provides a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern (e.g., tactile output 503 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.5), Figure 5A11) that includes: between 0.5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and400Hz (e.g., a MiniTap at 8GHz, 100Hz, 125Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz, 230Hz, 270Hz, or 300Hz, as shown in Figures 4F and 4G); and in accordance with a determination that the

196

DK 2016 70738 A1 vtce forgoes providing the fust tactile input does not meet the activation criteria, the de output (e.g., in Figures 5A4-5A8).

(00581( In some entbodintents, the first tactile output pattern includes (1906) between 0.5 and 2 cycles of oscillation o f th e one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., a FuliTap with 2 cycles of oscillation, a M iniTap with 1 cycle o f oscillation, or a MicroTap with 0.5 cycle of oscillation, as shown in Figure 4F).

(00582] In some embodiments, the first tactile output pattern includes (1908) between 1 and 2 cycles of oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., a FuliTap with 2 cycles of oscillation, or a MiniTap with 1 cycle of oscillation, as shown in Figure 4F).

(00583] in some embodiments., the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs (1910) at a frequency between 200Hz and 350Hz. te.g.. as shown in Figure 4F).

(00584( In some embodiments, the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs (1912) at the frequency between 225Hz and 325Hz (e.g., a MiniTap at 230Hz, a MiniTap at 270Hz, or a MiniTap at 300Hz, as shown in Figures 4F and 4K).

(00585( In some embodiments., the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs (1914) at a variable frequency selected front two or more frequencies between 150 Hz and 400Hz (e.g., a MiniTap at 230Hz, a MiniTap at 270Hz, or a MiniTap at 300Hz, as shown in Figures 4F and 4K).

(00586( Turning now to Figure 19B, in some embodiments, in response to detecting the input on the home button (1916); in accordance with a determination that ihe input meets the activation criteria (e.g., that the input includes an intensity above the respective intensity threshold) and that a change in a characteristic intensity of the input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above the respect ive intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric (e.g., a “soft” intensity), the device provides the fast tactile output with a fast amplitude that corresponds to the first value of the intensity-change metric (e.g.. tactile output 590 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of

197

DK 2016 70738 A1

0.5), Figure 5B62); and in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria (e.g., that the input includes an intensity above the respective intensity threshold) and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric different from the first vaiue of the intensity-change metric (e.g., a “normal” intensity), the device provides the first tactile output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for the intensitychange metric (e.g., tactile output 592 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B67), and the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude. An example of varying the amplitude of a tactile output, based on an intensity-change metric is described in greater detail above with reference to method 1500.

[00587] In some embodiments, after detecting the input on the home button, the device detects (1918) a second input on the home button. In response to detecting the first input and before detecting the second input, the device provides (1918) the first tactile output with a third amplitude (e.g., tactile output 571 (e.g., Mini Tap 270 Hz with a gain of I). Figure 5B6, or tactile output 582 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 1), Figure 5B4Ö). In response to detecting an input sequence including the input and the second input, the device determines, based at least in part on an amount of time between a first point in time (e.g,, a time at which the press event for the input was detected or a time at which the release event for the input was detected) and a second point in time that corresponds to the second input (e.g., a time at which the press event for the second input was detected or a time at which the release event for the second input was detected), whether the input and fire second input are separate inputs (e. g,, as shown in Figures 5B39-5B4S) or are part of an input pattern (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B5-5BI4).

[00588] In accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to tire input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second input, that the input and the second input are separate inputs (e.g., because the second point In time is greater than a threshold amount of time after the first point in time) (e.g,, as shown in Figures 5B39-5B48), the device provides a second tactile output with the third amplitude (e.g., tactile output 584 (e.g,, MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of f). Figure 5B45), and the second tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected. In accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first

198

DK 2016 70738 A1 point in time and the second point in time, that the input and the second input are part of a (predefined) input pattern (e.g.. because the second point in time is Seas than a threshold amount of time after the first point in time) (e.g., as shown in Figures 5B5-5B34), the device provides a third taetiie output with a fourth amplitude (e.g., tactile output 573 (e.g., MiniTap 270 Hz with a gain of 0.8). Figure 5Bi 0) that is distinct from the third amplitude, and the third tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected. In some embodiments, the threshold amount of time is a press event to press event time period, in some embodiments, the threshold amount of time is a release event to release event time period. An example of varying the amplitude of a tactile output based on a time threshold is described in greater detail above with reference to method 1700.

)00589] With reference now to Figure S 9C, in some embodiments, the input on the home button was detected while a first user interface is displayed on the display (e.g., user interface 512, Figure 5 A3) (e.g., a user interface of a first application, an expanded folder overlaid on a darkened home screen, an expanded notification overlaid on a darkened home screen, a control panel overlaid on a darkened home screen, a multitasking user interface that concurrently presents multiple user interfaces, a secondary' page of a multi-page home screen, a notification screen., a widget screen, etc.). In response to detecting the input on the home button; hi accordance with a determination that die input meets the activation criteria (e.g,, as shown in Figure 5A11), the device ceases to display the first user interface and displays a second user interface (e.g., user interface 510, Figure 5A14) on the display (e.g., a home screen, a primary page of a multi-page home screen, etc. ); and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria (e.g., as shown in Figures 5A4-5Ä7), the device maintains display ofthe first user interface on the display (e.g., user interface 512, Figure 5A8).

100590] In some embodiments, the second user interface is a system user interface (e.g,, a home screen, a primary page of a multi-page home screen, a multitasking screen, a virtual assistant screen, etc,), such as user interface 510 in Figure 5A14.

100591 j It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in

Figures 19A-19(2 have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described

199

DK 2016 70738 A1 herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes descr ibed herein wirb respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700. 900, 1100. i .iOO, 1500, and 1700) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1900 described above with respect to Figures 19A-19C. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, locus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 1900 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, audio outputs, intensity thresholds, time thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 900, 1100,

1300, 1500, and 1700). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[0Ö592] in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 20 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 2000 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. 1'he functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to cany out the principles of the various described embodiments, ft is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 20 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein, (00593( As shown in Figure 20, the electronic device 2000, includes a display unit 2001 configured to display information (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 (also referred to as a touch screen and touch screen display), Figure I A), a touch-sensitive surface unit 2004 (e.g., display controller 156 and touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1 A) configured to receive contacts, gestures, and other user inputs on the touch screen display, one or more sensor units 2006 configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touchsensitive surface unit and/or a respective button of the device (e.g., a home button), one or more tactile output generating units 2007 for generating tactile outputs, and a processing unit 2008 coupled with the display unit 2002, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2004, the one or more sensor units 2006, and the one or more tactile output generating units 2007. For ease of illustration. Figure 20 shows display unit 2002 and touch-sensitive surface unit 2004 as integrated with electronic device 2000, however, in some embodiments one or both of units are in communication with the electronic device, although the units remain

200

DK 2016 70738 A1 physically separate from the electronic device te.g.. as shown and explained in reference io Figure 3). In some embodiments, the processing unit includes a displaying unit (e,g., displaying unit 2009), an input detecting unit (e.g., input detecting unit 2010), a determining unit (e.g,, determining unit 2012), and a tactile output providing unit (e.g., tactile output providing unit 2014).

[00594] In some embodiments, the processing unit {or one or more components thereof such as the units 2010-2014) is configured to: detect art input on the respective button (e.g., with the input detecting unit 2010), and the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007) in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation of the respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed.

in response to detecting the input on the respective button: (i) in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria (e,g.. with the determining unit 2012), the activation criteria including a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, provide a fust tactile output with a first tactile output pattern (e.g , with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007) that includes between 0.5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tacti le output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation ofthe one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80 Hz and 400Hz; and f ii) in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria (e.g., with the determining unit 2012), forgo providing the first tactile output.

[00595] In some embodiments, the first tactile output pattern includes between 0.5 and 2 cycles of oscillation ofthe one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators.

100596] In some embodiments, the first tactile output pattern includes between i and cycles of oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions ofthe one or more tactile output generators.

205

DK 2016 70738 A1 [00597] In. some embodiments, the oscillation of ihe one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 200Hz and 350Hz.

(00598] in some embodiments, the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at the frequency between 225Hz and 325Hz.

[00599] In some embodiments, the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a variable frequency selected from two or more ff equencies between

150 Hz and 400Hz, [00600] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the input on the home button: in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria and that a change in a characteristic intensity of the proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above th respective intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric, provide the first tactile output with a first, amplitude that corresponds to the first value of the intensitychange metric (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007); and in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria and that fhe change in the characteristic intensity of the input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a second value for the Intensity-change metric different from the first value of the intensity-change metric, provide the first tactile output with a second amplitude that, corresponds to the second value for the intensity-change metric (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007), wherein the second amplitude is different from the first (00601 ] In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: after detecting the input on the home button, detect a second input on the home button (e.g., with, the input defecting unit 2010); in response to defecting tire first input and before detecting the second input, provide the first tactile output with a third amplitude (e.g., with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007); in response to detecting an input sequence including the input and the second input: in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the input and a second point in time that, corresponds to the second

202

DK 2016 70738 A1 input, that the input and the second input are separate inputs: provide a second tactile output with the third amplitude (e.g.. with the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007), and the second tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected; and in accordance with a determination, based ou the amount of time between the first point in tune and the second point in time, that the input and the second input, are part of an input, pattern: provide a third tactile output w uh a losuth amplitude that is distinct from the thud amplitude ie g , v. nh the tactile output providing unit 2014 in conjunction with the one or more tactile output providing units 2007), and the third tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected.

[00602] in some embodiments, the input on the home button was detected while a first user interface is displayed on the display and the processing unit is configured to; in response to detecting the input on the button: in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria: cease to display the first user interface (e.g., with the displaying unit 2009); and display a second user interface on the display (e.g., with the displaying unit 2009); and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, maintain display of the fir the displaying unit 2009).

st user interface on the display (e.g.. with [00603] hi some embodiments, the second user interface is a system user interface.

[00604] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application-specific chips, [00605] The operations described above with reference io Figures 19A- I9C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-1.8 or Figure 20. For example, detection operation 1902 and responding operation f904 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application .136-1. A respective event recognizer 1 SO of application 13b-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch203

DK 2016 70738 A1 sensitive surface (or whether rotation ofthe device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation ofthe device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handl er 190 associated with the detection of the calls data updater 170 or object n some embodiments, event event or sub-event Hent handler 190 optionally uses or updater 177 to update the application internal state 192, i handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear io a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

(00606| Exemplary methods, electronic devices, information processing aparratusses and non-transitory computer-readable storage media are set out in the following items 1 to 289.

I, A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the devi ce:

displaying, on the display, a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detecting an input directed to the first user interfece;

in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface; ceasing to display the first user interface, and displaying a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface; white displaying the second user interface, detecting a contact on the home button; while continuously detecting the contact on the home button;

detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity ofthe contact above a first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, displaying a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user interlace;

while displaying tlie beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, detecting an input sequence that includes detecting

204

DK 2016 70738 A1 a press input that includes an increase in ihe characteristic intensity of ihe contact above the first intensity threshold.

in response to detecting the input sequence;

in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected;

ceasing to display the second user interface, and redisplaying the first user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before the end of the press input is defected:

reversing the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, and redisplaying the second user interface on the display.

2. The method of item I, wherein ceasing to display' the second user interface and redisplaying the first user interface includes displaying a continuation of the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back fo the first user interface.

3. The method of any of items 1-2, wherein displaying the beginning of ihe transition from ihe second user interface back to the first user interlace includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of the second user interface with at least a portion of the fust user interface.

4. The method of any of items 1-3, wherein the first user interface is a home screen that includes a. plurality of application launch icons that corresponds to different applications on the electronic device.

5. The me thod of any of items 1 -3. wherein the first user interface and the second user interface are consecutively displayed user interfaces of an application.

6, The method of any of items 1-5, wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes reducing a size of the second user interface.

205

DK 2016 70738 A1

7. T he method of item 6, including:

revealing the first user Interface from behind the second user interface, as the second user interface is reduced in size.

8. The method of any of items 6-7, wherein:

the second user interface ts a user interface of a first application, the first application corresponds to a first, application launch icon in the first, user interface, and reducing the size of the second user interf ace includes shrinking the second user interface toward a position of the first app lication launch icon on the first user interface .

9. The method of any of items 6-7, wherein:

the second user interface includes an expanded folder, the expanded folder corresponds to a first folder icon in the first user interface, and reducing the size of die second user interface includes shrinking the expanded folder toward a position of the first, folder icon on the first user interface.

10. The method of any of items 1 -5. wherein displaying the beginning of ihe transition from the second user interface back to the first user mterfaee includes shifting the second user interface laterally in a first direction.

11. The method of item 10, including:

revealing the first user interface, as the second user interface is shifted laterally in the first direction.

12. The method of any of items 1-5, wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes fading the second user interface;

13. The method of item 12, including:

shifting the first user mterfaee laterally in a first direction fo cover the second user interface, as the second user interface fades out.

206

DK 2016 70738 A1

14. The method of any of items 1-5, wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes changing a virtual : one of the first user i nterface and the second user interface.

15. The method of item 1-5, wherein.' the second user interface includes a representation of the first user interface, and displaying the beginning of the transition horn the second user interface hack to the first user interface includes expanding the representation of the first user interface included in the second user interface and reducing a virtual depth of the representation of the first user interface.

16. The method of item 1-15, wherein;

detecting the input sequence further includes detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence; and, the method includes.

in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence, dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

17. The method of item 16, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes;

dynamically changing a blur radius applied to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

18. The method of any of items 16-17. wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interlace to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes;

dynamically revealing at least a portion of the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

207

DK 2016 70738 A1

The method of any of items 16-18, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes:

dynamically shifting a position of the second user interface on the display in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact, wherein a corresponding amount of the fust user interface is revealed as the position of the second user interface is dvnamicaliv shifted in accordance vuth the characteristic intensity of the contact.

20. The method of any of items 16-19, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes:

dynamical ty changing an opacity of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

21. The method of any of items 16-20, wherein.

die second user interface is an expanded version of a portion of the fust user interface; and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes;

dynamically changing a size of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensitv of the contact.

22. The method of any of items 16-21_; wherein:

fhe second user interface includes a representation of the first user interface, and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with fhe characteristic intensity of the contact includes:

dynamically changing a virtual depth of the representation of the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

23. The method, of any of items 1 -22, wherein the first user interface is a home screen, the second user interface is a user interface of a first application, and the method includes:

in response to detecting the input sequence:

208

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with the determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, closing or suspending the first application.

24. The method of any of items 1 -22, wherein the first user i nterface is a primary page of a multi-page home screen, and the second user interface is a secondary page of a multipage home screen.

25. The method of any of items 1 -22, wherein the first user interface is a home screen, wherein the home screen includes a first folder icon that corresponds to a first folder that includes one or more folder items; and the second user interface i ncludes an expanded view of the first folder that includes larger representations of the one or more folder items.

26. The method of any of items I -25, wherein:

the device includes one or more tactile output generators, and the method includes:

in response to detecting the input sequence:

in accordance with the determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, generating a first tactile output.

27. The method of any of items I -26. including:

generating a tactile output upon detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold.

28. The method of any of items 1 -26, met uding:

forgoing generating a tactile output in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold.

29. The method of any of items 1 -28, including, in accordance with a determination that the Input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of long press criteria, interrupting an animated transition from die second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a third user interface that is associated with the long press criteria.

209

DK 2016 70738 A1

30.. The method of any of items 1-29, including, in accordance with a determination thai ihe input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of multiple-click criteria, interrupting an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a fourth user interface that is associated with the multiple-click criteria.

31. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device;

one or more processors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or mom processors, the one or more programs including instructions for;

displaying, on the display, a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detecting an input directed to the first user interface;

in. response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface; ceasing to display the first user interface, and displaying a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface;

while displaying the second user interfece, detecting a contact on the home button;

while continuously detecting the contact on the home button;

detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, displaying a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface;

210

DK 2016 70738 A1 while displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, detecting an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the charac teristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting the input sequence.

ceasing to display the second user interface, and redisplaying the first user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that, the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before the end of the press input is detected;

32. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to;

display, on the display, a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detect an input directed to the first user interface;

in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface: cease to display the first user interface, and display a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface;

while displaying the second user interface, detect a contact on the home button;

while continuously detecting the contact on the home button:

detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold;

ϊ

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, display a beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface;

while display ing the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interlace, detect an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting the input sequence;

in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria require that the characteristic intensity offne contact increases above a second in tensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected ;

cease to display the second user interface, and redisplay the first user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensit y threshold before the end of the press input is detected:

reverse the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, and redisplay fhe second user interface on the display.

33. An electronic device, comprising:

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of th device: and means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface;

means for, while displaying the first user interface, detecting an input directed to the first user interface;

means for, in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface: ceasing to display the first user interface, and displaying a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface; while displaying the second user interface, detecting a contact on the home button; while continuously detecting the contact on the home button:

212

DK 2016 70738 A1 detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity ofthe contact above a first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact to the first intensity threshold, displaying a. beginning of a transition from the second user iuterface back to the first user interlace;

while displaying the beginning of the transition front the second user interlace back to the first user interface, detecting an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold;

means for. in response to detecting the input sequence:

in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected:

ceasing to display the second user interface, and redisplaying the first user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensi ty threshold before the end of the press input is detected:

34. Au information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button ofthe device, comprising:

means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface;

means for, in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface; ceasing to display fhe first user interface, and displaying a second user interface, distinct from the first user interface; while displaying the second user interface, detecting a contact on the home button; while continuously detecting the contact on the home button:

213

DK 2016 70738 A1 detecting an increase in a characteristic intensit y of the contact above a first intensity threshold;

in response to detecting· the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, displaying a beginning of a transition front the second user interface back to the first user interlace, while displaying the beginning of the transition front the second user interlace back to the first user interface, detecting an Input sequence that snehules detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold;

means for, in response to detecting the input sequence:

in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets first criteria, wherein the first cri teria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second Intensity threshold before an end of the press input is detected:

ceasing to display the second user interface, and redisplaying the first user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensity threshold before the end of the press input Is detected:

reversing the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, and redisplaying the second uset interface on the display.

35. An electronic device, comprising; ft display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including Instructi ons for performing any of the methods of items 1-30,

214

DK 2016 70738 A1

A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, ihe one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to perform any of tlie methods of items

1-30.

A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more sensors to detect, intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory·, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 1-30.

38. An electronic device, comprising;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and means for performing any of the methods of items 1 -30.

39. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 1-30.

40. An electronic device, comprising;

a display unit configured to display user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures, and other user inputs;

one or more sensor units configured to detect intensities of contacts with the touchsensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units, the processing unit configured to;

display, on the display, a first user interface;

DK 2016 70738 A1 user interface;

button;

while displaying the first user interlace, detect an input directed to the first in response to detecting the input directed to the first user interface; cease to display the first user interface, and display a second user interface, distinct front the first user interface; while displaying the second user interface, detect a contact on the home while continuously detecting tite contact on the home button;

detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensify threshold;

in response to defecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, display a'beginning of a transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface;

white displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, detect an input sequence that includes detecting a press input that includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity ihreshold;

in response to detecting the input sequence;

cease to display the second user interface, and redisplay the fust user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input sequence meets second criteria, wherein the second criteria require that the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the second intensify ihreshold before the end of the press input is detected;

reverse the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface, and redisplay the second user interface on the display.

216

DK 2016 70738 A1 i The electronic device of item 40, wherein eeasing to display the second user interface and redisplaying the first user interface includes displaying a continuation of the besinnins of the transition from the second user interface hack to the first user interface.

42. The electronic device of any of items 40-41., wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of the second user interface with at least a portion of the first user interface.

43. The electronic device of any of items 40-42, wherein the first user intertaee is a home screen that includes a plurality of application launch icons that corresponds to different applications on the electronic device.

44. The electronic device of any of items 40-42, wherein the first user interface and the second user interface are consecutively displayed user interfaces of an application.

45.

Ihe electronic device of any of items 404, wherein displaying the beginning of tbe transition from the second user intertaee back to the first user interface includes reducing a size of the second user interface.

4b. The electronic device of item 45, reveal the first user interface .fron user interface is reduced in size.

wherein the processing unit is configured to: i behind the second user interface, as the second

47. The electronic device of any of items 45-46, wherein:

the second user interface is a user interface of a first application, the first application corresponds to a first application launch icon in the first user interface, and reducing the size of t he second user interface includes shrinking t he second user interface toward a position of the first application launch icon on the first user interface.

48, The electronic device of any of Items 45-46, wherein;

the second user interface includes an expanded folder, the expanded folder corresponds to a first folder icon in the first user interface, and

217

DK 2016 70738 A1 reducing the size of the second user interface includes shrinking the expanded folder toward a position of the fust folder icon on the first user interface.

49. The electronic device of any of items 40-44, wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes shifting the second user interface laterally In a first direction.

50. The electronic device of item 49, wherein the processing unit Is configured to; reveal the first user interface, as the second user Interface is shifted laterally in the first direction.

51. The electron ic device of any of items 40-44, wherein displaying the beginning of the transition from the second user interfiice back to the first user interface includes fading the second user interface.

52. any of The electronic device of item 51. wherein tire processing unit is configured to:

shift the first user interface laterally in a first direction to cover the second user interface, as tbe second user interface fades out.

53. The electronic device of any of items 40-44, wherein displaying the beginning of tbe transit ion from the second user interlace back to tbe first user interface includes changing a virtual depth of at least one of the first, user interface and the second user interface.

54. The electronic device of any of items 40-44, wherein:

the second user interface includes a representation oft.be first user interface, and display ing the beginning of the transition from the second user interface back to the first user interface includes expanding the representation of the first user interface included in the second user interface and reducing a. virtual depth of the representation of the first user interface.

55, The electronic device of any of Items 40-54, wherein;

detecting the input sequence further includes detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between tbe first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence; and.

2i8

DK 2016 70738 A1 the processing unii is configured to, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity ofthe contact varies between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold before the first criteria are met by the input sequence, dynamically advance and reverse the transition from the second user interface to the first user interlace in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact,

56. The electronic device of item 55, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes:

dynamically changing a blur radius applied to tlie first user interfece in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

57. The electronic device of any of items 55-56, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes:

dynamically revealing at least a portion ofthe first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact.

Täte electronic device of any of items 55-57, wherein dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the. first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes;

dynamically shifting a position of the second user interface on the display in accordance with t he characteristic intensity of tlie cont ac t, wherein a corresponding amount of the first user interface is revealed as the position of the second user interface is dynamically shifted in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact,

59. The electronic device of any of items 55-58, wherein dynamically advancing and reversinu the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity ofthe contact includes:

dynamically changing an opacity of the second user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

60.

The electronic device of any of items 55-59, wherein:

219

DK 2016 70738 A1 the second user interface is an expanded version of a portion of the first user interface; and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface in accordance with the characteristic intensity cd’the contact includes:

dynamically changing a size of the second user interlace in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.

61. The electronic device of any of items 55-60. wherein;

the second user interlace includes a representation of the first user interface, and dynamically advancing and reversing the transition from the second user interface to the first user interface In accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact includes:

62. The electronic device of any of items 40-61, wherein the first user interface is a home screen, the second user interface is a user interface of a first application, and the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the input sequence:

in accordance with the detennination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, close or suspend the first application.

63. The electronic device of any of items 40-61., wherein ihe first user interface rs a primary page of a multi-page home screen, and the second user interface is a secondary page of a multi-page home screen.

64. The electronic device of any of items 40-61, wherein the first user interface is a home screen, wherein the home screen includes a first folder icon that, corresponds to a first folder that includes one or more folder items; and ihe second user interface includes an expanded view of the first folder that includes larger representations of the one or more folder items.

65. The electronic device of any of Items 40-64, wherein:

the device Includes one or more tactile output generators, and

220

DK 2016 70738 A1 ihe processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the input sequence:

in accordance with the determination that the input sequence meets the first criteria, generate a first tactile output.

66. The electronic device of any of items 40-65, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

generate a tactile output upon detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold.

67. The electronic device of any of items 40-65, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

forgo generating a tactile output in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold.

68. The electronic device of items 40-67, wherein the processing unit, is configured to, in accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of long press criteria, interrupt an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a third user interface that is associated with the long press criteria.

60. The electronic device of items 40-68, wherein the processing unit is configured to, in accordance with a determination that the input sequence includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact abo ve the second intensity threshold and satisfaction of multiple-click criteria, interrupt an animated transition from the second user interface to the first user interface to display an animated transition to a fourth user interface that is associated with the multiple-click criteria.

70. A method, comprising; at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, and a displaying a first user interface;

DK 2016 70738 A1 w hile dispiaying the first user interface, detecting a first input, wherein the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface;

in response to detecting the first input, starting to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to a second user interface;

while the first animated transition is being displayed, detecting a second input; and

In response to detecting the second Input;

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time;

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and in accordance with a. determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time;

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

71.. The method of item 70, including;

in response to detecting the second input;

in accordance with a determination that the second input meets first criteria, and that that the second input is received at a third time that is after the second time, continuing to display the first animated transition.

The method of any o f items 70-71, wherein the first time and the second time occur before a threshold time for detecting a double-click input that includes the first input.

>?·?

DK 2016 70738 A1

T he method of any of items 71-72, wherein the third lime occurs after the threshold time for detecting a double-click input that includes the first input.

74. The method of any of items 70-73, wherein the second first input.

is a repetition of the

75. The method of any of items 70-74, wherein the first animated transition front the first user interface to the second user interface includes movement of the first user interface in a fast direction, and the second animated transition includes movement of the first user interface in a second direction that is distinct from the first direction.

76. The method of any of items 70-75, including:

In response to detecting the second input:

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with a request to display a fourth user interface, distinct from the first, second, and third user interfaces· interrupting the first animated transition from die first user interface to the second user interface at a third point in the first animated transition, distinct from the first and second points in the first animated transition, and displaying a fourth animated transition from the third point in the first animated transition to the fourth user interface, wherein the fourth animated transition is different from the first, second and third animated transitions.

77. The method of item 76, wherein the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes mo vement of the first user interface in a first direction, the fourth animated transition includes movement of the first user interface In a second direction that is opposite the first direction, and the third animated transition is in a third direction that is orthogonal to the first and secood directions.

78. The method of any of items 70-77, including: in response to detecting the second input:

in accordance with a determination diat the second input Is consistent with a request to transition to a fifth user Interface:

223

DK 2016 70738 A1 interrupting the first animated transition from the First, user interface to the second user interface at a fourth point in the first, animated transition, and displaying a fifth animated transition from the fourth point in the first animated transition to the fifth user interface, wherein the fifth animated transition is diffeieut frotn the first, second and third animated transitions

The method of any o f i tems 70-78, including:

while displaying the first user interface, prior to detecting the first input:

detecting a precursor input for the first input;

in response to defecting the precursor input, displaying a hint animation wherein the hint animation includes a start of the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface.

80. The me thod of any of .items 70-79, wherein :

the first user interface is a user interface of a first application, the method includes generating the first animated transition in accordance with a location of a first application launch icon on the second user interface.

81. The method of any of items 70-80. wherein:

detecting the first, input includes detecting a first press input by a first contact on a home button, wherein the first press input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold followed by a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a second intensify threshold.

82. The method of item 81, including generating a first tactile output in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold.

83. The method of any of items 8.1 -82, including generating a second tactile output in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the second intensity threshold.

84. The method of any of items 70-83 including, in response to detecting the second input:

224

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that the second input, is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a fourth time that is after the second time:

continuing to display the first animated transition from the first user interface io the second user interface, and displaying a fifth animated transition from an end of the first animated transition to the third user interlace, wherein the fifth animated transition is different from the second animated transition and the third animated transition.

85. The method of any of items 70-84 including, in response to detecting the second in accordance with a determination that the second input is not consistent with the request to display the third user interface, forgoing transitioning to the third user interface.

86. An. electronic device, comprising; a display;

a much-sensitive surface:

one or more processors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for;

displaying a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input, wherein the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface;

while the first animated transition is being displayed, detecting a second input; and in response to detecting the second input^-

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user inte first time;

face, and that the second input is received at a interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request fo display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time;

interrupting the first animated transition from die first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the firsf point in the first animated transition, and displaying a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

87. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to:

dispiay a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detect a first input; wherein the first input is consistent, with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface, in response to detecting the first input; start to display a first animated transition the first user interface to a second user interface;

white the first animated transition is being displayed, detect a second input; and in response to detecting the second input;

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time:

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and

226

DK 2016 70738 A1 display a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and in accordance with a determination drat the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time:

intemipt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the fest point in the first animated transition, and display a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

88. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface: and means for displaying a first user interface'.

means for, while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input, wherein the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface;

means for, in response to detecting the first input, starting to display a first animated transition from tfre first user interface to a second user interface;

means for, while the first animated transition is being displayed, detecting a second input; and means for, in response to detecting the second input:

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that fhe second input is received at a first time:

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and >-)7

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time:

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a third animated transition front the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

89. An information processing apparatus for use In an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising:

means for displaying a first user interface;

means for, in response to detecting the first input, starting to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to a second user interface;

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a first time;

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a second animated transition from the first point in tire first animated transition to the third user Interface; and in accordance with a determination that the second input Is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time:

228

DK 2016 70738 A1 interrupting ihe first animated transition horn the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, different from the second animated transition.

wherein the third animated transition is

90. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface; one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of ihe methods of items 70-85.

91. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 70-85.

02. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance wit h any of die methods of hems 70-85.

93. An electronic device, comprising; a display ;

a touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing any of the methods of items 7()-85.

94. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising;

means for performing any of the methods of items 70-85.

An electronic device, comprising:

DK 2016 70738 A1 display unit configured to display user interfaces;

touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures, and other user inputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit configured to:

display a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detect a first input, wherein the first input is consistent with a request to display a second user interface and a request to display a third user interface;

in response to detecting the first input, start to display a first animated transition from the first, user interface to a second user interface;

while the first animated transition is being displayed, detect a second input; and in response to detecting the second input;

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at. a first time:

interrupt, the first animated transition from the first, user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and display a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a second time that is after the first time;

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at. a second point in the first, animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and display a third animated transition from the second point in

96. The electronic device of item 95, wherein the processing unit ts configured to; in response to detecting the second input;

the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transit ion is different from the second animated transition.

230

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets first criteria, and that that the second input is received at a third time that is after the second time, continue to display die first animated transition.

97. The electronic device of any of items 95-96, wherein the first time and the second time occur before a threshold time for detecting a double-dick input that Includes the first

I'he electronic device of any of items 96-97. wherein the third time occurs after the threshold time tor detecting a double-click input that includes the first input.

99. The electronic device of any of items 95-98, wherein the second input is a repetition of the first input.

100. The electronic device of any of items 95-99, wherein the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes movement of the first user interface in a first direction, and the second animated transition includes movement of the first user interface in a second direction that is distinct, from tlte first direction.

101. The electronic device of any of items 95-100, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

In response to detecting the second input;

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with a request to display a fourth user interface, distinct from the first, second, and third user interfaces:

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a third point in the first animated transition, distinct from the first and second points in the first animated transition, and display a fourth animated transition from the third point in the first animated transition to the fourth user interface, wherein the fourth animated transition is different from the first, second and third animated transitions.

102. The electronic device of item 101.. wherein the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface includes movement of the first user interface in a first direction, the fourth animated transition includes movement of the first user interface in

235

DK 2016 70738 A1 a second direction that is opposite the first direction, and the third animated transition is in a third direction that is orthogonal to the fust and second directions,

103. The electronic device of any of items 95-102, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the second input:

in accordance with a detennination that the second input is consistent with a request to transition to a fifth user Interface;

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a fourth point in the first animated transit ion, and display a fifth animated transition from the fourth point in the first animated transition to the fifth user interface, wherein the fifth animated transition is different from the first, second and third animated transitions,

104. The electronic device of any of items 95-103, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

while displaying the first user interface, prior to detecting the first input, detect a precursor input for the first input:

in response to detecting the precursor input, display a hint animation wherein the hint animation includes a start of the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface.

105. The electronic device of any of items 95-104. wherein:

the first user interface is a user interlace of a first application, the processing unit is configured to generate the first animated transition in accordance with a location of a first application launch icon on the second user interface.

106. The electronic device of any of items 95-105. wherein:

detecting the first input includes detecting a first press input by a first contact on a home button, wherein the first press input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold followed by a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a second intensity threshold.

107. The electronic device of item 106, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

232

DK 2016 70738 A1 generate a first tactile output in r esponse to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold.

108. The electronic device of any erf items 106-107, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

generate a second tactile output in response to detecting the decrease in fhe characteristic intensity of the first contact below the second intensity threshold.

109. The electronic device of any of items 95-108 wherein the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the second mpaf:

in accordance with a determination that the second input is consistent with the request to display the third user interface, and that the second input is received at a fourth time that is after the second time:

continue to display the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface, and display a fifth animated transition ironi an end of the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the fifth animated transition is different from the second animated transition and the third animated transition.

110. The electronic device of any of items 95-109 wherein the processing unit is configured to. in response to detecting the second input:

in accordance with a determination that the second input is not consistent with the request to display the third user interface, forgo transitioning to the third user interface,

111. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators:

displaying, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on d home button;

233

DK 2016 70738 A1 w hile displaying the home button configuration user interface, detecting selection of a respective tactile output setting ofthe home button ofthe plurality of different tactile output settings;

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detecting a first input ofthe first type on the home button·, and, in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and.

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

112, The method of item SIT including: in response to detecting the first input ofthe first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output, setting is a third tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting and the second tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third tactile output that corresponds to the third tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

i 13. The method of any of items 111-112, including:

in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button, presenting a prompt requesting a user to provide an input of the first, type on the home button.

i 14. The method of any of items 111-113, wherein:

the first taetde output and the second tactile output have different frequencies and the same waveform.

115. The method of any of items 111-114, including:

234

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response ίο detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, providing a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output; and, ir. accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is tbe second tactile output setting for the home button, providing a second audio output concurrently with the second tactile output.

116. The method of any of items 111-115, wherein;

providing the first tactile output that corresponds to foe first tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the first tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of foe first input of the first type; and the method inc ludes, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that foe respecti ve tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type.

117. The method of item 116, including:

providing a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output, in response to detecting the first portion of the first input of the first type, and providing a first additional audio output concurrently with the first additional tactile output, tn response to detecting the second portion of the first input of the first type.

118. The method of item 117, wherein the amplitudes of the first audio output the first additional audio output differ by a first amount, the amplitudes offne fust tactile output and the first additional tactile output differ by a second amount., distinct from the first amount.

119. The method of any of items 111-115, wherem;

providing the second tactile output that corresponds ίο the second tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the second tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and foe method includes, in response to detecting foe first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that foe respective tactile output setting is

235

DK 2016 70738 A1 the second tactile output setting for the honte button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type.

120. The method of any of items 111-119, including·.

in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button;

iu accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the honte button, displaying a first animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the first tactile output setting toward the home button, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, displaying a second animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the second tactile output setting toward die home button.

121. The method of item 120, wherein the representation of the first tactile output setting and the representation of the second tactile output setting have the same shape as the home button.

122. The method of any of items 120-121, wherein the first animated indication includes an anima ted representa tion of a first, tactile output characteristic associated with the first tactile output setting, and the second animated indication includes an animated representation of a second tactile output characteristic associated with tire second tactile output setting.

123. T he method of any of items 111-122. including:

in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output, setting for the home button, changing an appearance of a representation of the first tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for täte home button, changing an appearance of a

236

DK 2016 70738 A1 representation of the second tactile output set ting in the honte button configuration user interface.

124. The method of any of items 111-123, including;

while displaying the home button configuration user interface., displaying a first affordanee that, when activated, causes dismissal of the home button configuration user interface, and causes display of another user interface in place of the home button configuration user interface.

125 The method of item 124, including:

while displaying the home button configuration user interface and the first allordance. detecting activation of the first affordanee; and in response to detecting the activation of the first affordanee:

ceasing to display the home button configuration user mterfaee; and displaying a respective user interface that is distinct from the home button configuration user interface:

while displaying the respective user interface, detecting a second input of the first e on the borne button; and, in response to detecting die second input of the first type on the home button;

ceasing to display the respective user interface;

displaying a third user interface that is distinct from the respective user interface; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a respective tactile output that corresponds to the respective tactile output setting for the home button selected at the time when the affordanee was activated.

was

126. The method of any o f items 111-125, including· while the respective tactile output setting for die home button is selected, detecting a first input of a second type on the home button, the second type is distinct from the first type; and, in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button.

in accordance wiih a determination that ihe respective tactile output setting is tbe first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile

237

DK 2016 70738 A1 output generators, the first tactile output that corresponds to the fust tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

127

An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for;

displaying, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality o f di fferen t tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

while displaying the home button configuration user interface, detecting selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detecting a first input of the first type on the home button; and, in response to detecti ng t he first input of the first type on the ho me button; in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface;

and.

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile

238

DK 2016 70738 A1 output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface

128. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, die one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to;

display, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

while displaying the home button configuration user interface, detect selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input of the first type on the home button; and, in response to detecting the first input of die first type on die home button;

in accordance with a determination that ihe respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, ia accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing tb home button configuration user interface.

129. An electronic device, comprising;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and

239

DK 2016 70738 A1 means for displaying; on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings tor the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

means for, white displaying the home button configuration user interface, detecting selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

means for, while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detecting a first input of the first type on the home button; and, means for, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a detennination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

i 30, Au information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for displaying, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismi ss a currently displayed user Interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

means for, while displaying the home button configuration user interface, detecting selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

240

DK 2016 70738 A1 means for, while the respective tactile output setting for the home hution is selected, detecting a first input ofthe first type on the home button; and, means for, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home hution without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting Is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a. second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

i:

An electronic devtce, comprising:

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of ihe methods of items 111-126.

132. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 11.1-126.

13? A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any ofthe methods of items 111126.

ΐ

DK 2016 70738 A1

134. An eiectronic device, comprising', a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any ofthe methods of items 111-126.

135. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensit ive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising;

means for performing any ofthe methods of items 111-126.

. so.

An electronic device, comprising.

a display unit configured to display user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures.

and other user one or more tactile output generating units configured to generate tactile outputs;

and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generating units, the processing unit configured to;

while displaying tire home button configuration user interface, detect selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

while the respective taetiie output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input of the first type on the home button; and, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button;

tn accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting tor the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output

242

DK 2016 70738 A1 setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output, setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

137. The electronic device of item 136, wherein the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting fhe first input of the first type on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a th ird tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting and the second tactile output setting, for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third tactile output that corresponds to the third tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

13$. The electronic devic configured to:

of any of items 136-137, wherein the processing unit is in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button, present a prompt requesting a user to provide an input of the first type on the home button.

139. The electronic device of any of items 136-138, wherein:

the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different frequencies and the same waveform.

140. The electronic device of any of items 136-.139, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the first input of the first type on fhe home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output; and,

243

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a detennination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, provide a second audio output concurrently with the second tactile output.

141. The electronic device of any of items 156-140, wherein:

providing the first tactile output that corresponds to die first tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the first tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and the processing unit is configured to. In response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of die first input of the first type.

142. The electronic device of item 141, wherein the processing unit is configured to^- provide a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output, in response to detecting the first portion of the first Input of the first type; and provide a first additional audio output concurrently with the first additional tactile output, hi response to detecting the second portion of the first input of die first type.

143. The electronic device of item 142, wherein the amplitudes of the first audio output the first additional audio output differ by a first amount, the amplitudes of the first tactile output and the first additional tactile output differ by a second amount, distinct from the first amount.

144, The electronic device of any of Items 136-140, wherein;

providing the second tactile output that corresponds to the secood tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the second tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and the processing unit is configured to.

in response to detecting the first input of the output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type.

first type on the home button, in accordance with a detennination that the respective tactile

244

DK 2016 70738 A1

145. The electronic device of any of herns 136-144, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button:

it', accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, display a first animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the first tactile output setting tonatd the home button, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting Is the second tactile output setting for the home button, display a second animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the second tactile output, setting toward the home button.

146. The electronic device of item 145, wherein the representation of the first tactile output setting and the representati on of the second tactile output setting have the same shape as the home button.

147,

The electronic device of any of items 120-146, wherein the first animated indication includes an animated representation of a first tactile output characteristic associated with the first tactile output setting, and the second animated indication includes an animated representation of a second tactile output characteristic associated with the second tactile output setting.

• 48. The electronic device of any of items 136-147, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the first input offne first type on the home button:

in accordance with, a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, change an appearance of a representation of the first tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, change art appearance of a representation of the second tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface.

245

DK 2016 70738 A1

149. The electronic device of any of items 136-148, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

while displaying the home button configuration user interface, display a first affordance that, when activated, causes dismissal of the home button configuration user interface, and causes display of another user interface in place of ihe home burton configuration user interface.

150. The electronic device of item 149, wherein the processing unit is configured to; while displaying the home button configuration user interface and the first affordance, detect activation of the first affordance; and in response to detecting the activation of the first affordance;

cease to display the home button configuration user interface; and display a respective user interface that is distinct from the home button configuration user interface;

while displaying the respective user interface, detect, a second input of the first type on the home button; and.

in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button; cease to display tire respective user interface; display a third user interface that is distinct from the respective user interfitee; and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, a respective tactile output, that corresponds to the respective tactile output setting for the home button that was selected at the time when the affordance was activated.

151. The e lectronic device of any of items 136-150. wherein the processing unit is configured to;

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detect a first input of a second type on the home button, the second type is distinct from the first type; and.

in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the respecti ve tactile output, setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via tlie one or more tactile output

246

DK 2016 70738 A1 generators, the first tactile output thai corresponds io the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

A method, comnrisina:

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators;

displaying, on the display, a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

white displaying the fust user interface, detecting a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, performing a first operation and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, performing the first operation, and forgoing providing at least a portion, of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation, after performing the first operation, detecting a second input, of the first type on the home button; and in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button:

performing a second operation that is associated with the home button; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of fhe home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at tire device.

247

DK 2016 70738 A1 i 53. The method of item 152, wherein the first user interface is a user interface of a first application, the first operation is an operation of the first application, and the second operation includes dismissing the first application.

154. The method of any of items 152-153, including:

after performing the first operation, detecting a first input of a second type, distinct from the first type, on the home button; and in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button: performing a third operation, distinct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at die electronic device.

155. The method of any of items 152-154, including:

after performing the first operation, detecting a first input of a third type., distinct horn the first type, on the home button; and in response to detecting the first input of the third type on the home button:

performing a fourth operation, distinct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the eleeironic device,

156. T he method of any of items 152-155, wherein the first tacti ie output and the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button are provided by the same orte or more actuators of the one or more tactile output generators.

157. The method of any of items 152-156, wherein a tactile output pattern of a corresponding tactile output that is provided in response to a respective input of ihe first type on the home button is user-adjustable,

158 . The method of anv of items 152-157, ineludirm:

248

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response to detecting the second input ofthe first type on the home button, providing an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, and without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device.

159. The method of any of items 152-158, including:

in response to detecting the second input ofthe first type on the home button, providing an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, wherein a volume of the audio output is independent of a current volume setting at die device.

160, The method of any of items 152-159, including:

in response to detecting the .first input ofthe first type directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled:

in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are not muted at the device, providing an audio output with the first tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are muted at the device, forgoing providing the audio output with the first tactile output.

161. The method of any of items 152-160, including;

in. response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled.

in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a first level at the device, providing an audio output with the first tactile output at a first volume that is determined based on the first level of the audio outputs at the device; and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a second level at the device, providing the audio output with the first tactile output at a second

249

DK 2016 70738 A1 volume that is di fferent from the fust volume and is determined based on the second level of the audio outputs at the de vice.

162. The method of any of items 160-161, including.

in response to detecting the first input of the lust type directed to the first user interfece:

in accordance with a determination that user interfece tactile outputs are disabled, forgoing providing the audio output with the first tactile output, without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device.

163. The method of any of items 152-162, including;

in response to detecting the first input of the first type, directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a detennination that user interfece tactile outputs are disabled and in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a predefined exempted operation, providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output genetators.

164. The method of any of items 152-163, including:

in response to detecting the first input of the first, type directed to the first user interface.' in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled;

in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a first type of predefined operation, providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators; and in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a second type of predefined operation, performing the first operation and without providing tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators;

and in accordance with a determination that user interfece tactile outputs are enabled, performing the first operation and providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators, without regard to whether the

250

DK 2016 70738 A1 first operation is of ihe first type of predefined operation or the second type of predefined operation.

165. .An electronic device, comprising;

a. touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs:

otte or more processors;

displaying, on the display, a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a. currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, performing a first operation and providing, via the one or mote tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, performing the first operation, and forgoing providing at least a portion of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

after performing the first operation, detecting a second input of the first type on the home button; and in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button; performing a second operation that is associated with the home button; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with act ivation of the ho me button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

251

DK 2016 70738 A1

166. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, ihe one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, cause the device to:

display, on the display, a first user interlace, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

white displaying the first user interface, detect a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in response to detecting die first input of die first type directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a determination that user interlace tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, perform a first operation and provide via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, perform the first operation, and forgo providing at least a portion ofthe first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

after performing fhe first operation, detect a second input ofthe first type on the home button; and in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button ; perform a second operation that is associated with the home button; and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation ofthe home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

167. An electronic device, comprising:

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating taetde outputs; and means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

252

DK 2016 70738 A1 means for, while displaying the first user interface.. detecting a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

means for, in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, performing a first operation and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, performing the first operati on, and forgoing providing at least a portion of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

means for, after performing the first operation, detecting a second input of the first type on the home button; and means for, in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button;

performing a second operation that is associated with the home button; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

168, An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, comprising;

means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

means for, while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

means for, hi response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a. determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, performing a first operation and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

253

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile ouipuis are disabled, performing the first operation, and forgoing providing at least a portion of the fust tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

means for, after performing the first operation, detecting a second input of the first type on the home button, and means for, in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button:

performmg a second operation that is associated with the home burton; and providing, via the one or more tactile output, generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

169. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs; one or more processors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any ofthe methods of items 152-164.

170. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, cause foe device to perform any of the methods of items 152-164.

171, A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance wdh any ofthe methods of items 152-164.

172. An electronic device, comprising:

254

DK 2016 70738 A1 a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs; and means for performing any of the methods of stems 152-164.

173, An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, compri si ng;

means for performing any of the methods of items 152-164, .174,

An electronic device, comprising.

a display unit configured to display user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures.

display, on the display, a first user interface, wherein a home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

while displaying the first user interface, detect a first input of the first type directed to the first user interface;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device, perform a first operation and provide via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, perform the first operation, and forgo providing at l east a portion of the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation;

after performing the first operation, detect a second input of the first type on the home button; and

255

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response to deieeiing ihe second input of the First type on the home button: perform a second operation that is associated with the borne button;

and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activat ion of the home button. without reaard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the device.

175. The electronic device of item 174, wherein the first user interface is a user interface ofa first application, the first operation is an operation of the first application, and the second operation includes dismissing the first application.

176. The electronic device o f any of items 174-175, wherem the processing unit is configured to:

after performing the first operation, detect a fu st input of a second type, distinct from the first type, on the home button; and in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button: perform a thiid opetation, dist inct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button; and provide, via täte one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device.

177 The electronic device of any of items 174-176, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

after performing the first operation, detect a first input of a third type, distinct from the first type, on the home button; and in response to detecting the first input of the third type on the home button: perform a fourth operation, distinct from the second operation, that is associated with the home button: and provide, via the one or more tactile output generators, tactile output that is associated with activation of ihe home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled at the electronic device.

256

DK 2016 70738 A1 i 78. The electronic device of any of items 174-177, wherein the first tactile output and the tactile output that is associated with activation of the home button are provided by the same one or more actuators of the one or more tactile output generators.

179. The electronic device of any of items 174-178, wherein a tactile output pattern of a corresponding tactile output that is provided in response to a respective input ofthe first type on the home button is user-adjustable.

180. The electronic device of any of items 174-179, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button, provide an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation ofthe home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, and without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device.

181. The electronic device of any of items 174-.180, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the second input ofthe first type on the home button, provide an audio output with the tactile output that is associated with activation ofthe home button, without regard to whether or not user interface tactile outputs are enabled, wherein a volume of the audio output is independent of a current volume setting at the device.

182. The electronic device of any of items 174-181, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface:

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled;

in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are not muted at the device, provide an audio output with the first, tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are muted at the device, forgo providing the audio output with the first tactile output.

257

DK 2016 70738 A1 i 83. The electronic device of any of items 174-Ϊ 82, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in accordance with a determination that user interlace tactile outputs are in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a first in response to detecting the first input of the first type directed to the first user interface:

enabled:

level at the device, provide an audio output with the first tactile output at a first volume that is determined based on die first level of the audio outputs at the device; and in accordance with a determination that audio outputs are set to a second level at the device, provide the audio output with the first, tactile output at a second volume that is different from the first volume and is determined based on the second level of the audio outputs at the device.

184. The electronic device of any of items 182-183, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled, forgo providing the audio output with the first tactile output, without regard to whether or not audio outputs are muted at the device.

185. The electronic device of any of items 174-.184, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are disabled and in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a predefined exempted operation, provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators.

186. The electronic device of any of items .174-185, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

258

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response to detecting the first inputofthe interface:

st type directed to the first user in accordance with a determination that user interface taetiie outputs are hi accordance with a determination that the first operation is a first type of predefined operation, provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators: and in accordance with a determination that the first operation is a second type of predefined operation, perform the first operation and without providing tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators; and in accordance with a determination that user interface tactile outputs are enabled., perform the first operation and provide the first tactile output that corresponds to the first operation with the one or more tactile output generators, without regard to whether the first operation is of the first type of predefined operat ion or the second type of predefined operation.

187. A method, comprising;

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button ofthe device:

laying a user interface on the while displaying the user interface, detecting an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button; and in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity ofthe contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an Intensity-chaage metric:

259

DK 2016 70738 A1 performing a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or mote tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold: and in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of the intensitytge metric:

performing the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

188. The method of item 187, wherein:

the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have a same waveform; and first, discrete tactile output second discrete tactile output have different amplitudes.

189. The method of any of items 187-188, wherein the first discrete tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of fhe contact is maintained above the first intensity threshold.

190. The method of any of items 187-1 89, wherein the second tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of the contact is maintained above the first intensity threshold.

191. The method of any of items 187-190, wherein the first tactile output is generated for a first ranne of values of the intensitv-ehanae metric.

260

DK 2016 70738 A1

192. T he method of item 191, wherein the second tactile output is generated for a second rance of valnes of the intensity-change metric.

i 93. The method of any of items 187-192, wherein;

detecting the input sequence on the home button further includes detecting a first release input on the home button, following the first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first release input includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button; and the method includes:

in response to detecting the first release input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below a second intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensify of the contact decreases below the second intensify threshold has a third value for the intensity-change metric:

generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has a fourth value for the intensity-change metric, different from the third value of the intensity-change metric:

generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fourth discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensitv threshold and is different from the third discrete tactile output.

194. The method of item 193, wherein:

generating the first and second tactile outputs includes applying a first modification to a base tactile output pattern in accordance with the first and second values of the intensity-change metric, respectively; and

Ϊ

DK 2016 70738 A1 generating the third and fourth tactile outputs includes applying a second modification, distinct from the first modification, to the base tactile output pattern in accordance with the third and fourth values of the intensity-change metric, respectively.

195. The method of any of items 193-194, wherein the second intensity threshold is different from the first intensity threshold.

196, The method of any of items 187-195, wherein the first discrete tactile output and tlie second discrete tactile output are generated from a base haptic output pattern that is associated with a currently selected tactile output setting from a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button.

197, The method of any of items 187-196, wherein the home button is persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on the device that is separate from the display.

198. The method of any of items 187-197, wherein the intensity-change metric Is based on a rate of change of die characteristic Intensity of the contact over time.

199. The method of any of items 187-197, wherein the intensity-change metric is based on a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact measured at a time that the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a relevant threshold mtensity.

200, The method of any of items 187-199, wherein:

detecting the input sequence includes detecting a second press input on the home button, wherein detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the home button;

the method includes, in response to detecting the second press input:

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are part of a predefined input pattern;

performing a second operation associated with tlie predefined Input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and

262

DK 2016 70738 A1 providing, via the one ot more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output., distinct trom the first and second tactile outputs.

201. The method of any of items 187-199, wherein;

the method includes:

in response to detecting the first press input, providing a first audio output concurrently with a respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that was generated in response to the first press input; and in response to detecting the second press input;

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are part of a predefined input, pattern·, performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation;

providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, wherein the fifth tactile output is identical to the respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that w as generated for the first press input; and providing a second audio output concurrently with the fi discrete tactile output, wherein the second audio output and the first audio output have different audio output patterns.

203. An electronic device, comprising;

202. The method of any of items 187-201, including:

in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

changing the user interface from a first user interface to a second user interfece, without, regard to the value of the intensity-change metric that corresponds to the first press input.

263

DK 2016 70738 A1 a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tac the output generators for genera ting tactile outputs;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs inc hiding instructions for;

displaying a user interface on the display;

while displaying the user interface, detecting an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity ofa contact on the home button; and in response to detecting the first press input on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an Intensity-change metric;

performing a first operation that, changes the user interface displayed on the display: and ueneraitnu, via the one or more tactile output venerators. a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold: and in accordance with a determination that tlie first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of the intensitychange metric;

performing the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and

264

DK 2016 70738 A1 generating., via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

204. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that., when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to:

display a user interface on the display;

while displaying the user interface, detect an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the home button; and in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that fee first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric:

perform a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic Intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of the intensitychange metric:

265

DK 2016 70738 A1 perform the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact above the first intensity threshold and is different born the first discrete tactile output

205. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and means for displaying a user interface on the display;

means for, while displaying the user interface, detecting an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on tlie home button; and means for, in response ίο detecting the first, press input on ihe home button:

in accordance with a determination that the firsi press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity ofthe contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric:

forming a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of tlie contact above the first intensity threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in tlie characteristic intensity of the contact above tlie first intensity threshold, and that the change tn the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a

266

DK 2016 70738 A1 second value for the intensity-change metric, different· from the first value of the intensitychange metric:

performing die first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

206. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, comprising;

means for displaying a user interface on the display;

means for, while displaying the user interface, detecting an input sequence on the home button that includes detecting a first press inpnt on the home button, wherein detecting the first press input includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on die home button; and means for, in response to detecting the first, press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric:

performing a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of die contact above the first intensity threshold; and in accordance with a. determination that fhe first press input includes an increase in die characteristic intensity of the contact above die first intensity threshold, and that the change tn the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a

267

DK 2016 70738 A1 second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the first value of ihe intensitychange metric:

performing the first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the fun intensttv threshold and ts different from the fitst dtsetete tactile output.

207. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more processors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 187-202.

20$ A computer-readable storage medium storing otte or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that,, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 187-202,

200. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 187-202.

268

DK 2016 70738 A1 ä 0. An electronic device, comprising', a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more taetde output generators tor generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button ofthe device; and means for performing any ofthe methods of Items 187-202,

211. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a toueh-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button ofthe device.

composing:

means for performing any of the methods of items 187-202,

212. An. electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display user interfaces'.

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures, and other user one or more tactile output generating units configured to generate taetde outputs; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of fhe device; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or more tactile output generating units., and the one or more sensor units, the processing unit configured to;

display a user interface on the display;

in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a first intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact proximate to a time when the

269

DK 2016 70738 A1 characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric.

perform a first operation that changes the user interface displayed on the display; and generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fust discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the first press input includes an increase in tire characteristic intensity of the contact above tire first intensity threshold.

and that the change in the characn istic intensity of the contact proximate, to the rime when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric, different from the irrst value of fhe intensitychange metric;

perform the fest operation that changes the user interlace displayed on ihe display; and generate, via the one or more tactile output, generators, a second discrete tactile output that corresponds to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold and is different from the first discrete tactile output.

213. The electronic device of item 212, wherein;

the first, discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have a same waveform; and the first discrete tactile output and the second discrete tactile output have different amplitudes.

214. The electronic device of any of items 212-213, wherein the first discrete tactile output stops while the characteristic intensity of the contact is maintained above tire first intensify th;

215, The electronic device of any of items 212-214. wherein the second tactile output stops while the characteristic intensiu of the contact o maintained above fhe first intensity threshold.

270

DK 2016 70738 A1

216. The electronic device of any of items 212-215, wherein the first tactile output is generated for a first range of values offne intensity-change metric.

217. The electronic device of item 216, wherein the second tactile output is generated for a second range of values of the intensitv-chanee metric.

2.18. The electronic device of any of items 212-217. wherein:

detecting the input sequence on die home button further includes detecting a first release input on the home button, following the first press input on the home button, wherein detecting the first release input includes detecting a decrease in fhe characteristic intensity of the con tact on the home button; and the processing unit is configured to:

in response io detecting the first release input, on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the first release input includes a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below a second intensity threshold, and that a change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the second intensity threshold has a third value for the intensity-change metric;

generating, via fhe one or more tactile output generators, a third discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in tlie characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the first, release input includes a decrease in ihe characteristic intensity of fhe contact below the second intensity threshold, and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact proximate to the time when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below' the second intensity threshold has a fourth value for the intensity-change metric, different front the third value of the intensity-change metric;

generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fourth discrete tactile output that corresponds to the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second intensity threshold and is different from the third discrete tactile output.

219. The electronic device of item 218, wherein;

DK 2016 70738 A1 generating fire first and second tactile outputs includes applying a fust modification to a base tactile output pattern in accordance with fire first and second values of the intensity-change metric, respectively; and generating the third and fourth tactile outputs includes applying a second modification, distinct from the first modification, to the base tactile output pattern in accordance with the third and fourth values of the intensity-change metric, respectively.

220. The electronic device of any of items 218-219, wherein the second intensity threshold is different from the first intensity threshold.

221, The electronic device of any of items 212-220, wherein the first discrete tactile output and tire second discrete tactile output are generated from a base liaptie output pattern that is associated with a currently selected tactile output setting from a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button.

222. The electronic device of any of items 212-221, wherein tire home button is persistently displayed at a respective location or located at a persistent location on device that is separate fror

223. The electronic device of any of items 2.12-222, wherein the intensity-change metric is based on a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact over time.

224. fhe electronic device of any of items 212-222, wherein the intensity-change metric is based on a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the contact measured at a time that the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a relevant threshold intensity.

225. The electronic device of any of items 212-224, wherein:

detecting the input sequence includes detecting a second press input on the home button, wherein detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensit y of the contact on the home button; and the processing unit is configured to, in response to detecting the second press input: hi accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are pari of a predefined input pattern:

272

DK 2016 70738 A1 performing a second operation, associated with ihe predefined input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, distinct from the first and second tactile outputs.

226, The electronic device of any of items 212-224, wherein:

detecting the input sequence includes detecting a second press input on the home button, wherein detecting the second press input includes detecting a second increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe contact on the honte button; and the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the first press input, providing a first audio output concurrently with a respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that was generated in response to the first press input; and in response to detecting the second press input:

In accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are part of a predefined Input pattern:

performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation;

providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a fifth discrete tactile output, wherein the fifth tactile output is identical to the respective one of the first and second tactile outputs that was generated for the first press input; and providing a second audio output concurrently with the fifth discrete tactile output, wherein the second audio output and the first audio output have different audio output patterns.

227. The electronic device of any of items 212-226, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

change the user interlace ftoat a first user interlace to a second user interface, without regard to the value of the intensity-change metric that corresponds to the first press input273

DK 2016 70738 A1

228. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts wifo a home button of the device:

displaying a first user interface;

while displaying tbe first user interface, detecting;

a first press Input on the home button; and a second press input on the home button that is detected after the first press input;

in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, providing a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile, wherein the first, non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first, press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators;

in response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input performing a first operation associated with the first press input; and providing a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherem the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between die first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern;

performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and providing a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the fast non-visual output profile, wherein the third non-visual

274

DK 2016 70738 A1 οιπριπ provides feedback indicating drat ihe second press input was detected and ihe thin non-visual output indudes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

229. The method of item 228, wherein the first point in time is one of:

a time at which a charac teristic intensit y of the first press input increased above a press intensity threshold, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of the first press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

230. The method of any of items 228-229, wherein the second point in time is one of a time at which a characteristic intensity of the second press input increased above a press intensity threshold, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of the second press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

231. The method of any of items 228-230, including:

in response to detecting the input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs:

performing a third operation associated with the second press input.

232. The method of any of items 228-231. wherein performing the first uperation associated with the first press input includes performing the first operation in response to a release event of the first press input.

233. The method of any of items 228-232, wherein the tactile output of the third nonvisual output is different from the tactile output of tire first non-visual output.

234, The method of any of items 228-233, wherein a first audio output of die first nonvisual output is different from a second audio output of the third non-visual output,

235. The method of any of items 228-234, wherein:

DK 2016 70738 A1 the fsrsi press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the home button above the intensity threshold.

236. The method of any of items 228-234, wherein:

the first press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button Is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the home button above the press intensity threshold followed by a second release event that corresponds to a decrease in tbe characteristic intensity of the second contact below the release intensity threshold.

237. The method o f any of items 235-236, including:

in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that an intensity-change metric of the first press input has a first value, providing the first non-visual output with a first amplitude that corresponds to the first value for the intensity-change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the first press input has a second value different from die first value, providing the first nonvisual output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for the intensitychange metric, wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude.

238. I he method of any of items 235-237, including:

in response to detecting the second press input on the home button;

276

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a detennination that an intensity-change metric of the second press input has a third value, providing the second non-visnal output with a third amplitude that corresponds to the third value for die intensity-change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value different {torn the third value, providing the second non-visual output with a fourth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the fourth amplitude is different from the third amplitude; and in accordance with a determination that the first press input and die second press input are part of the input pattern;

in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has the third value, providing the third non-visual output with a fifth amplitude that corresponds to the third value for die intensity change metric; and in accordance with a detennination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value, providing the third non-visual output with a sixth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the sixth amplitude is different from the fifth amplitude.

239. The method of any of items 228-238, including:

in response to detecting the first press input, wherein the first press input is consistent with a request to transition to a second user interface and a request to transition to a dtird user interface, starting to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interfece:

in response to detecting the second press input, wherein the second press input is detected while the first animated transition is being displayed;

in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a second time that is after the first time;

a first time;

interrupting the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and

DK 2016 70738 A1 interrupting ihe first animated transition from the First, user mterfaee to the second user interface ai a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in the first animated transition, and displaying a ihird animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition lo the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from the second animated transition.

240. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts wi th a home button of the device;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more progrants configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for.

displaying a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detecting;

in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, providing a first non-visual output, with a first non-visual output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators;

in response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button;

In accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point In time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs;

278

DK 2016 70738 A1 performing a first operation associated with the first press and providing a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that, the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or tnore tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and tlte second point in time, that the first press input and the second press Input are part of an input pattern;

performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is difierent from the first operation; and providing a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein the third nonvisual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

241. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output, generators for generating tactile outputs. one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to;

display a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface. detect;

a first press input on the home button; and a second press input on the home button that is detected after the first press in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, provide a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more taetiie output generators;

279

DK 2016 70738 A1 in. response to detecting an input sequence including the first press input and ihe second press input, on the home button;

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to rite second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs;

perform a first operation associated with the first press input; and provide a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part of an Input pattern;

perform a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and provide a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein the third non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by fhe one or more tactile output generators.

242. An electronic device, comprising; ft display;

a touch-sensitive surfaceone or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and means for displaying a first user interface;

means for, while displaying fhe first user interface, detecting;

280

DK 2016 70738 A1 means for, in response ίο detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, providing a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators;

means for, in response to detecting an input sequence including the first, press input and the second press input on the home button·, in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs:

performing a first operation associated with the first press input; and providing a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern:

performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and providing a third non-visual output, with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein the third non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press Input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators.

comprising:

means for displaying a first user interface;

means for, while displaying the first user interface, detecting:

243. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device.

5

DK 2016 70738 A1 a first press input on the home button; and a second press input on the home button that is detected after the first press means for, in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, providing a first non-visua! output with a first non-visua! output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators;

means for, in response to detecting an input sequence including tire first press input and the second press input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount, of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs:

performing a first operation associated with fhe first press input: and providing a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output, provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance wit h a determination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the first press input and the second press input are part ofan input pattern:

performing a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different from the first operation; and providing a third non-visual output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein fhe third non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by fhe one or more tactile output generators.

244. Au electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

;>s?

DK 2016 70738 A1 one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of die device;

one or more processors;

tnemory storing one or more programs configured tor execution by the one or snore processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 228-239.

245. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instmctions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect in tensities of contacts with a home button of the device, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 228-239.

246. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 228-239.

247. An electronic device, comprising;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and means for perforining any of the methods of items 228-239.

248. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or mote sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device, comprising;

means for performing any of the methods of items 228-239.

281

DK 2016 70738 A1

249. An electronic device, comprising'.

a display unit configured to display user interfaces:' a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect contacts, gestures, and other user inputs;

one or more tactile output generating units configured to generate tactile outputs: one or more sensor units configured to detect intensities of contacts with a home button of the device; and a processing unit coupled with the dispiay unit, the touch sensitive surface unit, the one or more tactile output generating units, and the one or more sensor units, the processing unit configured to:

display a first user interface;

while displaying the first user interface, detect:

in response to detecting the first press input and before detecting the second press input, provide a first non-visual output with a first non-visual output profile, wherein the first non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the first press Input was detected and the first non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators;

In accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the first press input and a second point in time that, corresponds to the second press input, that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs:

perform a first operation associated with the first press input;

provide a second non-visual output with the first non-visual output profile, wherein the second non-visual output provides feedback indicating that the second press Input was detected and the second non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators; and,

284

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a detennination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in tinte, that the first press input and the second press input are part of an input pattern:

perform a second operation associated with the input pattern, wherein the second operation is different front the first operation, and provide a third uon-visuai output with a second non-visual output profile that is distinct from the first non-visual output profile, wherein the third nonvisual output provides feedback indicating that the second press input was detected and the third non-visual output includes tactile output provided by the one or more tactile output generators,

250. The electronic device of item 249, wherein the first point in time is one of;

a time at which a characteristic intensity of the first press input increased above a press intensi ty threshold, and a time at which the characteristic intensity of täte first, press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

251. The electronic device of any of items 249-250, wherein the second point, irr time is one of:

a time at which a characteristic intensity of the second press input increased above a press intensity threshold, and a rime at which the characteristic intensity of the second press input decreased below a release intensity threshold.

252. The electronic decree of any of items 249-251, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the mput sequence including the first press input and the second press input on the home button;

perform a third operation associated with the second press input.

285

DK 2016 70738 A1

253. The electronic device of any of items 249-252, wherein performing the first operation associated with the first press input includes performing die first operation in response to a release event of the first press input.

254. The electronic device of any of items 249-253, wherein the tactile output of the third non-visual output is different from the tactile output of the first non-visual output.

255, The electronic device of any of items 249-254, wherein a first audio output of the first non-visual output is different from a second audio output of the third non-visual output.

256. The electronic device of any of items 249-255, wherein:

the first press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the home button above the press intensity threshold.

257. The electronic device of any of items 249-255. wherein:

the first press input on the home button is a first press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the home button above a press intensity threshold followed by a first release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below a release intensity threshold, and the second press input on the home button is a second press event that corresponds to an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on fee home button above the press intensity threshold followed by a second release event that corresponds to a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the second contact below the release intensity threshold.

258, The electronic device of any of items 235-257, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the first press input on the home button:

286

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that an intensity-change metric ofthe first press input has a first value, provide the first non-visual output with a first amplitude that corresponds to the first value for the intensity-change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the first press input has a second valne different front the first value, provide the first non-visual output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for the intensitychange metric, wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude.

259. The electronic device of any of items 235-258, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the second press input on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the first press input and the second press input are separate inputs;

in accordance with a determination that an intensity-change metric of the second press input has a third value, provide the second non-visual output with a third amplitude that corresponds to die third value for the intensity-change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value different from the third value, provide the second non-visual output with a fourth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the fourth amplitude is different from the third amplitude; and in accordance with a determination that the first press input and tlie second press input are part of the input pattern;

in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has the third value, provide the third non-visual output with a fifth amplitude that corresponds to the third value for the intensity change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the intensity-change metric of the second press input has a fourth value, provide the third non-visual output with a sixth amplitude that corresponds to the fourth value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the amplitude is different from the

260. The electronic device of any of items 249-259, wherein the processing unit is configured to:

287

DK 2016 70738 A1 in response ίο detecting the first press input, wherein the first press input is consistent with a request to transition to a second user interface and a request to transition to a third user interface, start to display a first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface;

in response to detecting the second press input, wherein the second press inpnt is detected while the first animated transition is being displayed:

in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a first time:

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a fust point in the first animated transition, and display a second animated transition from the first point in the first animated transition to the third user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the second press input is received at a second time that is after the first time:

interrupt the first animated transition from the first user interface to the second user interface at a second point in the first animated transition that is after the first point in fhe first animated transition, and display a third animated transition from the second point in the first animated transition to the third user interface, wherein the third animated transition is different from fhe second animated transition.

261, A method, comprising;

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, wherein the device includes one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device;

detecting an input on the respective button, wherein fhe one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation of the respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

in response to detecting the input on the respective button;

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria include a requirement that the input includes an intensity

288

DK 2016 70738 A1 above a respective intensity threshold in order the activation criteria to be met. providing a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes:

between 0,5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80 Hz and 400Hz; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgoing providing the first tactile output.

262, The method of item 261, wherein the first tactile output pattern includes between 0,5 and 2 cycles of oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators.

263 . The method of any of items 261-262, wherein the first tactile output pattern includes between 1 and 2 cycles of oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators.

264, The method of any of items 261-263, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs ai a frequency between 2001 lz and 350Hz.

265. The method of any of items 261-264, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at the frequency between 2251-lz and 32SHz.

266, The method of any of items 261-265, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at. a variable frequency selected from two or more frequencies between 150 Hz and 400Hz,

267, The method oi any of items 261 -266, including;

in response to detecting the input on the home button;

in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria and that a change in a characteristic intensity of the input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a first value lor an intensity-change metric, providing the first tactile output with a first amplitude that corresponds to the first value of the intensity-change metric ; and

289

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation, criteria and that the change in the characteristic intensity of the input, proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of the input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric different front the first value of the intensitychange metric, providing the first tactile output with a second amplitude that corresponds to the second value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude.

268. The method of any of items 261-267, including·.

after detecting the input on the home button, detecting a second input on the home button;

in response to detecting the first input and before detecting the second input, providing fhe first tactile output with a third amplitude;

in response io detecting an input sequence including the input and the second input: in accordance with a determinati on, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second input, that the input and the second input are separate inputs:

providing a second tactile output with the third amplitude, wherein the second tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected;

in accordance with a determination, based on the amount of time between the first, point in time and the second point in time, that the input and the second input are part of an input pattern:

providing a third tactile output with a fourth amplitude that is distinct from the third amplitude, wherein the third tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected.

269. The method of any of items 261-268, wherein;

the input on the home button was detected while a first user interface is displayed on the display;

the method includes;

in response to detecting the input on the home button:

290

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a detennination that the input, meets the activation criteria:

ceasing to display täte first user interface: and displaying a second user interface on the display; and in accordance with a detennination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, maintaining display of the first user interface on the display.

270. The method of item 269. wherein the second user interface is a svstem user tnterta.ee.

271. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators tor generating tactile outputs·.

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device;

one or mote processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or mom programs including instructions for;

detecting an input on the respective button, wherein die one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation of the respective burton when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

in response to detecting the input on the respective button;

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria, include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, providing a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes;

between 0,5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and

291

DK 2016 70738 A1 in accordance with a determination thai the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgoing providing the first tactile output.

272. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile ou tpu ts, one or more sensors to detect intensi ties of contacts with a respective button of the device, cause the device to:

detect an input on the respective button, wherein the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation ofthe respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

In response to detecting the input on the respective button:

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria Include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to he met, provide a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes:

between 0.5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions ofthe one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation ofthe one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and in accordance with a determination that the input docs not meet the activation criteria, forgo providing the first tactile output.

273. An electronic device, comprising:

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device; and means for detecting an input on the respective button, wherein the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective

292

DK 2016 70738 A1 button has been activated in. place of a mechanical switch that detects activation ofthe respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

means for, in response to detecting the input on the respective button;

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria include a requirement that the input includes art intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, providing a first tactile output w ith a first tactile output pattern that includes’.

between 0,5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation ofthe one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgoing providing the fest tactile output.

274. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensit ive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device, comprising:

means for detecting an input on the respective button, wherein the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that, the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation ofthe respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

means for, in response to detecting the input on the respective button:

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, providing a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes:

between 0.5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgoing providing tire firsf tactile output.

293

DK 2016 70738 A1

275. An electronic device, comprising', a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators tor generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the one or more processors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, tbe one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 249-260.

276. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the devi ce, cause the device to per form any of the methods of items 249-260.

277. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of tbe device, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 249-260.

278. An electronic device, comprising; a display;

a. touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs;

one or more sensors fo detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device, and means for performing any of the methods of items 249-260.

294

DK 2016 70738 A1

279. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a toach-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button of the device, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 249-260.

>80.

An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect, contacts, gestures, and other user one or more tactile output generating units configured to generate tactile outputs; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensities of contacts with a respective button ofthe device; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, fhe touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or more tactile output generating units, and the one or more sensor units, the processing unit configured to;

detect an input on the respective button, wherein the one or more tactile output generators are used to generate tactile outputs indicating that the respective button has been activated in place of a mechanical switch that detects activation ofthe respective button when the respective button is mechanically compressed;

in response to detecting the input on the respective button:

in accordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteria, wherein the activation criteria include a requirement that the input includes an intensity above a respective intensity threshold in order for the activation criteria to be met, provide a first tactile output with a first tactile output pattern that includes:

between ¢).5 and 4 cycles of an oscillation of fhe one or more tactile output generators relative to one or more corresponding neutral positions ofthe one or more tactile output generators, wherein the oscillation ofthe one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 80Hz and 400Hz; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, forgo providing fhe first tactile output.

295

DK 2016 70738 A1

i. The electronic device of item 280, wherein the first tactile output pattern includes between 0.5 and 2 cycles of oscillation of tbe one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators.

282. The electronic device of any of items 280-281, wherein the first tactile output pattern includes between 1 and 2 cycles of oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators relative to the one or more corresponding neutral positions of the one or more tactile output generators.

28.3. The electronic device of any of items 280-282, wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at a frequency between 200Hz and 350Hz.

284. The electronic device of any of items 280-283. wherein the oscillation of the one or more tactile output generators occurs at the frequency between 225Hz and 325Hz.

285. The electronic device of any of items 280-284, wherein the oscillation of rite one or more tactile output generators occurs at a variable frequency selected from two or more frequencies between 1 SO Hz and 400Hz,

286. The electronic device of any of items 280-285, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

in response to detecting the input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria and that a change in a characteristic intensity of tbe input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of tbe Input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a first value for an intensity-change metric, provide the first tactile output with a first amplitude that corresponds to the Irrst value of the intensity-change metric; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets the activation criteria and that tbe change in the characteristic intensit y of the input proximate to a time when the characteristic intensity of tbe input increases above the respective intensity threshold has a second value for the intensity-change metric different from the first value of the intensitychange metric, provide tbe first tactile output with a second amplitude that corresponds to

296

DK 2016 70738 A1 the second value for the intensity-change metric, wherein the second amplitude is different from the first amplitude.

287. The electronic device of any of items 280-286, wherein the processing unit is configured to;

after detecting the input on the home button, detect a second input on the home button;

in response to detecting the first input and before detecting the second input, provide the first tactile output with a third amplitude;

in response to detecting an input sequence including tlie input and the second input:

in accordance with a determination, based on an amount of time between a first point in time that corresponds to the input and a second point in time that corresponds to the second input, that the input and the second input are separate inputs:

provide a second tactile output with the third amplitude, wherein the second tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected; and in accordance wi t h a detennination, based on the amount of time between the first point in time and the second point in time, that the input and the second input are part of an input pattern:

provide a third tactile output with a fourth amplitude that is distinct Ifom the third amplitude, wherein the third tactile output provides feedback indicating that the second input was detected.

288. The electronic device of any of items 280-287, wherein:

the processing unit is configured to:

in response to detecting the input on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that tlie input meets the activation criteria;

cease to display the first user interface; and display a second user interface on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the activation criteria, maintain display ofthe first user interface on the display.

29?

DK 2016 70738 A1

289. The electronic device of item 288. wherein the second user interface is a system user interfece.

('00607] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the ill »strati ve discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments wife various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

298

DK 2016 70738 A1

Claims

What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more tactile output generators:

displaying, on the display, a home button configuration user interface that includes displaying a plurality of different tactile output settings for the home button, wherein the home button is available on the device in a plurality of different contexts to dismiss a currently displayed user interface in response to detecting an input of a first type on the home button;

while displaying the home button configuration user interface, detecting selection of a respective tactile output setting of the home button of the plurality of different tactile output settings;

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detecting a first input of the first type on the home button; and, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a second tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.
2. The method of claim 1, including: in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is a third tactile output setting, different from the first tactile output setting and the second tactile output setting, for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a third tactile output that corresponds to the third tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.

299

DK 2016 70738 A1
3. The method of any of claims 1-2, including:

in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button, presenting a prompt requesting a user to provide an input of the first type on the home button.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein:

the first tactile output and the second tactile output have different frequencies and the same waveform.
5. The method of any of claims 1-4, including:

in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, providing a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, providing a second audio output concurrently with the second tactile output.
6. The method of any of claims 1-5, wherein:

providing the first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the first tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and the method includes, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a first additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type.
7. The method of claim 6, including:

providing a first audio output concurrently with the first tactile output, in response to detecting the first portion of the first input of the first type; and providing a first additional audio output concurrently with the first additional tactile output, in response to detecting the second portion of the first input of the first type.

300

DK 2016 70738 A1
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the amplitudes of the first audio output the first additional audio output differ by a first amount, the amplitudes of the first tactile output and the first additional tactile output differ by a second amount, distinct from the first amount.
9. The method of any of claims 1-5, wherein:

providing the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button includes providing the second tactile output in response to detecting a first portion of the first input of the first type; and the method includes, in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button, in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a second additional tactile output in response to detecting a second portion of the first input of the first type.
10. The method of any of claims 1-9, including:

in response to detecting selection of the respective tactile output setting of the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, displaying a first animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the first tactile output setting toward the home button, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, displaying a second animated indication that includes movement of a representation of the second tactile output setting toward the home button.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the representation of the first tactile output setting and the representation of the second tactile output setting have the same shape as the home button.
12. The method of any of claims 10-11, wherein the first animated indication includes an animated representation of a first tactile output characteristic associated with the first tactile output setting, and the second animated indication includes an animated

301

DK 2016 70738 A1 representation of a second tactile output characteristic associated with the second tactile output setting.
13. The method of any of claims 1-12, including:

in response to detecting the first input of the first type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, changing an appearance of a representation of the first tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface, and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, changing an appearance of a representation of the second tactile output setting in the home button configuration user interface.
14. The method of any of claims 1-13, including:

while displaying the home button configuration user interface, displaying a first affordance that, when activated, causes dismissal of the home button configuration user interface, and causes display of another user interface in place of the home button configuration user interface.
15. The method of claim 14, including:

while displaying the home button configuration user interface and the first affordance, detecting activation of the first affordance; and in response to detecting the activation of the first affordance:

ceasing to display the home button configuration user interface; and displaying a respective user interface that is distinct from the home button configuration user interface;

while displaying the respective user interface, detecting a second input of the first type on the home button; and, in response to detecting the second input of the first type on the home button: ceasing to display the respective user interface;

displaying a third user interface that is distinct from the respective user interface; and

302

DK 2016 70738 A1 providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, a respective tactile output that corresponds to the respective tactile output setting for the home button that was selected at the time when the affordance was activated.
16. The method of any of claims 1-15, including:

while the respective tactile output setting for the home button is selected, detecting a first input of a second type on the home button, the second type is distinct from the first type; and, in response to detecting the first input of the second type on the home button:

in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the first tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, the first tactile output that corresponds to the first tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the respective tactile output setting is the second tactile output setting for the home button, providing, via the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that corresponds to the second tactile output setting for the home button without dismissing the home button configuration user interface.
17. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors;

memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-16.
18. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 1-16.

303

DK 2016 70738 A1

P31707/63266-7411

Page 1 of 170

I/O Subsystem

Display Controller 158 Optica! Intensity Haptic Other Input sensor(s) sensor(s) Feedback Controllers) Controller 158 Controller 159 Controller 161 160

M > o H 1^103 1^103 1^103 1^103 Optical Contact Tactile Output Other Input or Sensor(s) ii tTOi iöity Generator(s) Control 164 185 167 Devices 116

p103

TouchSensitive

Display

System 112